This patch introduces support for specifing views in .loc directives, so that the...
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c man end
251 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
252 @c Add an empty line for separation.
253 @c man begin TARGET
254 @ifset AARCH64
255
256 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
257 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
258 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
259 @end ifset
260 @ifset ALPHA
261
262 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
263 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
264 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
265 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
266 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
267 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
268 @end ifset
269 @ifset ARC
270
271 @emph{Target ARC options:}
272 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
273 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
274 [@b{-mcode-density}]
275 [@b{-mrelax}]
276 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
277 @end ifset
278 @ifset ARM
279
280 @emph{Target ARM options:}
281 @c Don't document the deprecated options
282 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
283 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
285 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
286 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
287 [@b{-mthumb}]
288 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
289 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
290 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
291 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
292 @end ifset
293 @ifset Blackfin
294
295 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
296 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
297 [@b{-mfdpic}]
298 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
299 [@b{-mnopic}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset CRIS
302
303 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
304 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
305 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
306 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
307 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
308 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
309 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset D10V
312
313 @emph{Target D10V options:}
314 [@b{-O}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset D30V
317
318 @emph{Target D30V options:}
319 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset EPIPHANY
322
323 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
324 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
325 @end ifset
326 @ifset H8
327
328 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
329 [-h-tick-hex]
330 @end ifset
331 @ifset HPPA
332 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
333 @end ifset
334 @ifset I80386
335
336 @emph{Target i386 options:}
337 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
338 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
339 @end ifset
340 @ifset I960
341
342 @emph{Target i960 options:}
343 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
344 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
345 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
346 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IA64
349
350 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
351 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
352 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
353 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
354 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
355 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
356 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
357 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset IP2K
360
361 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
362 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M32C
365
366 @emph{Target M32C options:}
367 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M32R
370
371 @emph{Target M32R options:}
372 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
373 @b{--W[n]p}]
374 @end ifset
375 @ifset M680X0
376
377 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
378 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset M68HC11
381
382 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
383 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
384 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
385 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
386 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
387 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
388 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MCORE
391
392 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
393 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
394 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
395 @end ifset
396 @ifset METAG
397
398 @emph{Target Meta options:}
399 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
400 @end ifset
401 @ifset MICROBLAZE
402 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
403 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
404 @end ifset
405 @ifset MIPS
406
407 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
408 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
409 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
410 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
411 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
412 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
413 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
414 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
415 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
416 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
417 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
418 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
419 [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
420 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
421 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
422 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
423 [@b{-mmips16e2}] [@b{-mno-mips16e2}]
424 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
425 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
426 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
427 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
428 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
429 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
430 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
431 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
432 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
433 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
434 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
435 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
436 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
437 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
438 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
439 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
440 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
441 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
442 @end ifset
443 @ifset MMIX
444
445 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
446 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
447 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
448 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
449 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
450 @end ifset
451 @ifset NIOSII
452
453 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
454 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
455 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
456 @end ifset
457 @ifset NDS32
458
459 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
460 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
461 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
462 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
463 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
464 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
465 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
466 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
467 [@b{-mb2bb}]
468 @end ifset
469 @ifset PDP11
470
471 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
472 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
473 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
474 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
475 @end ifset
476 @ifset PJ
477
478 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
479 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
480 @end ifset
481 @ifset PPC
482
483 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
484 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
485 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
486 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
487 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
488 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
489 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
490 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
491 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
492 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
493 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
494 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
495 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
496 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
497 @end ifset
498 @ifset PRU
499
500 @emph{Target PRU options:}
501 [@b{-link-relax}]
502 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
503 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
504 @end ifset
505 @ifset RL78
506
507 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
508 [@b{-mg10}]
509 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
510 @end ifset
511 @ifset RX
512
513 @emph{Target RX options:}
514 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
515 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
516 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
517 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
518 [@b{-mpid}]
519 [@b{-mrelax}]
520 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
521 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
522 @end ifset
523 @ifset RISCV
524
525 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
526 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
527 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
528 @end ifset
529 @ifset S390
530
531 @emph{Target s390 options:}
532 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
533 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
534 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
535 @end ifset
536 @ifset SCORE
537
538 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
539 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
540 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
541 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
542 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
543 @end ifset
544 @ifset SPARC
545
546 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
547 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
548 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
549 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
550 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
551 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
552 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
553 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
554 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
555 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
556 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
557 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
558 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
559 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
560 @b{-bump}]
561 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
562 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
563 @end ifset
564 @ifset TIC54X
565
566 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
567 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
568 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
569 @end ifset
570 @ifset TIC6X
571
572 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
573 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
574 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
575 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
576 @end ifset
577 @ifset TILEGX
578
579 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
580 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
581 @end ifset
582 @ifset TILEPRO
583 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
584 @end ifset
585 @ifset VISIUM
586
587 @emph{Target Visium options:}
588 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
589 @end ifset
590 @ifset XTENSA
591
592 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
593 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
594 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
595 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
596 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
597 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
598 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
599 @end ifset
600 @ifset Z80
601
602 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
603 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
604 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
605 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
606 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
607 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
608 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
609 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
610 @end ifset
611 @ifset Z8000
612
613 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
614 @end ifset
615
616 @c man end
617 @end smallexample
618
619 @c man begin OPTIONS
620
621 @table @gcctabopt
622 @include at-file.texi
623
624 @item -a[cdghlmns]
625 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
626
627 @table @gcctabopt
628 @item -ac
629 omit false conditionals
630
631 @item -ad
632 omit debugging directives
633
634 @item -ag
635 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
636
637 @item -ah
638 include high-level source
639
640 @item -al
641 include assembly
642
643 @item -am
644 include macro expansions
645
646 @item -an
647 omit forms processing
648
649 @item -as
650 include symbols
651
652 @item =file
653 set the name of the listing file
654 @end table
655
656 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
657 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
658 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
659
660 @item --alternate
661 Begin in alternate macro mode.
662 @ifclear man
663 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
664 @end ifclear
665
666 @item --compress-debug-sections
667 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
668 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
669 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
670 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
671
672 @ifset ELF
673 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
674 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
675 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
676 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
677 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
678 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
679 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
680 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
681 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
682 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
683 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
684 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
685 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
686 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
687 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
688
689 @end ifset
690
691 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
692 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
693 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
694 override this.
695
696 @item -D
697 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
698 other assemblers.
699
700 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
701 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
702 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
703
704 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
705 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
706 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
707 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
708 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
709 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
710
711 @item -f
712 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
713 compiler output).
714
715 @item -g
716 @itemx --gen-debug
717 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
718 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
719 ECOFF or DWARF2.
720
721 @item --gstabs
722 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
723 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
724
725 @item --gstabs+
726 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
727 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
728 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
729 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
730 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
731
732 @item --gdwarf-2
733 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
734 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
735 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
736
737 @item --gdwarf-sections
738 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
739 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
740 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
741 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
742 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
743 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
744 suffix.
745
746 @ifset ELF
747 @item --size-check=error
748 @itemx --size-check=warning
749 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
750
751 @item --elf-stt-common=no
752 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
753 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
754 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
755 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
756 @end ifset
757
758 @item --help
759 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
760
761 @item --target-help
762 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
763
764 @item -I @var{dir}
765 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
766
767 @item -J
768 Don't warn about signed overflow.
769
770 @item -K
771 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
772 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
773 @end ifclear
774 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
775 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
776 @end ifset
777
778 @item -L
779 @itemx --keep-locals
780 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
781 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
782 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
783 @ifclear man
784 @xref{Symbol Names}.
785 @end ifclear
786
787 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
788 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
789 listing to @var{number}.
790
791 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
792 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
793 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
794
795 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
796 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
797 @var{number} bytes.
798
799 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
800 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
801 to @var{number} + 1.
802
803 @item --no-pad-sections
804 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
805 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
806 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
807
808 @item -o @var{objfile}
809 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
810
811 @item -R
812 Fold the data section into the text section.
813
814 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
815 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
816 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
817 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
818 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
819 requirements at the expense of speed.
820
821 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
822 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
823 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
824 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
825
826 @ifset ELF
827 @item --sectname-subst
828 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
829 @ifclear man
830 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
831 @end ifclear
832 @end ifset
833
834 @item --statistics
835 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
836 assembly.
837
838 @item --strip-local-absolute
839 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
840
841 @item -v
842 @itemx -version
843 Print the @command{as} version.
844
845 @item --version
846 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
847
848 @item -W
849 @itemx --no-warn
850 Suppress warning messages.
851
852 @item --fatal-warnings
853 Treat warnings as errors.
854
855 @item --warn
856 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
857
858 @item -w
859 Ignored.
860
861 @item -x
862 Ignored.
863
864 @item -Z
865 Generate an object file even after errors.
866
867 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
868 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
869
870 @end table
871 @c man end
872
873 @ifset AARCH64
874
875 @ifclear man
876 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
877 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
878 @end ifclear
879
880 @ifset man
881 @c man begin OPTIONS
882 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
883 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
884 @c man end
885 @c man begin INCLUDE
886 @include c-aarch64.texi
887 @c ended inside the included file
888 @end ifset
889
890 @end ifset
891
892 @ifset ALPHA
893
894 @ifclear man
895 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
896 for an Alpha processor.
897 @end ifclear
898
899 @ifset man
900 @c man begin OPTIONS
901 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
902 processor.
903 @c man end
904 @c man begin INCLUDE
905 @include c-alpha.texi
906 @c ended inside the included file
907 @end ifset
908
909 @end ifset
910
911 @c man begin OPTIONS
912 @ifset ARC
913 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
914 processor.
915
916 @table @gcctabopt
917 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
918 This option selects the core processor variant.
919 @item -EB | -EL
920 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
921 @item -mcode-density
922 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
923 @end table
924 @end ifset
925
926 @ifset ARM
927 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
928 processor family.
929
930 @table @gcctabopt
931 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
932 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
933 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
934 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
935 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
936 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
937 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
938 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
939 @item -mthumb
940 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
941 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
942 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
943 @item -EB | -EL
944 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
945 @item -mthumb-interwork
946 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
947 ARM code in mind.
948 @item -mccs
949 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
950 @item -k
951 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
952 @end table
953 @end ifset
954 @c man end
955
956 @ifset Blackfin
957
958 @ifclear man
959 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
960 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
961 @end ifclear
962
963 @ifset man
964 @c man begin OPTIONS
965 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
966 the Blackfin processor family.
967 @c man end
968 @c man begin INCLUDE
969 @include c-bfin.texi
970 @c ended inside the included file
971 @end ifset
972
973 @end ifset
974
975 @c man begin OPTIONS
976 @ifset CRIS
977 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
978 @end ifset
979
980 @ifset D10V
981 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
982 a D10V processor.
983 @table @gcctabopt
984 @cindex D10V optimization
985 @cindex optimization, D10V
986 @item -O
987 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
988 @end table
989 @end ifset
990
991 @ifset D30V
992 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
993 processor.
994 @table @gcctabopt
995 @cindex D30V optimization
996 @cindex optimization, D30V
997 @item -O
998 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
999
1000 @cindex D30V nops
1001 @item -n
1002 Warn when nops are generated.
1003
1004 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1005 @item -N
1006 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1007 @end table
1008 @end ifset
1009 @c man end
1010
1011 @ifset EPIPHANY
1012 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1013 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1014
1015 @ifclear man
1016 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1017 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1018 @end ifclear
1019
1020 @ifset man
1021 @c man begin OPTIONS
1022 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1023 an Epiphany processor.
1024 @c man end
1025 @c man begin INCLUDE
1026 @include c-epiphany.texi
1027 @c ended inside the included file
1028 @end ifset
1029
1030 @end ifset
1031
1032 @ifset H8300
1033
1034 @ifclear man
1035 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1036 for an H8/300 processor.
1037 @end ifclear
1038
1039 @ifset man
1040 @c man begin OPTIONS
1041 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1042 processor.
1043 @c man end
1044 @c man begin INCLUDE
1045 @include c-h8300.texi
1046 @c ended inside the included file
1047 @end ifset
1048
1049 @end ifset
1050
1051 @ifset I80386
1052
1053 @ifclear man
1054 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1055 configured for an i386 processor.
1056 @end ifclear
1057
1058 @ifset man
1059 @c man begin OPTIONS
1060 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1061 an i386 processor.
1062 @c man end
1063 @c man begin INCLUDE
1064 @include c-i386.texi
1065 @c ended inside the included file
1066 @end ifset
1067
1068 @end ifset
1069
1070 @c man begin OPTIONS
1071 @ifset I960
1072 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1073 Intel 80960 processor.
1074
1075 @table @gcctabopt
1076 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1077 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1078
1079 @item -b
1080 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1081
1082 @item -no-relax
1083 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1084 error if necessary.
1085
1086 @end table
1087 @end ifset
1088
1089 @ifset IP2K
1090 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1091 Ubicom IP2K series.
1092
1093 @table @gcctabopt
1094
1095 @item -mip2022ext
1096 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1097
1098 @item -mip2022
1099 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1100 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1101
1102 @end table
1103 @end ifset
1104
1105 @ifset M32C
1106 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1107 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1108
1109 @table @gcctabopt
1110
1111 @item -m32c
1112 Assemble M32C instructions.
1113
1114 @item -m16c
1115 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1116
1117 @item -relax
1118 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1119
1120 @item -h-tick-hex
1121 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1122
1123 @end table
1124 @end ifset
1125
1126 @ifset M32R
1127 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1128 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1129
1130 @table @gcctabopt
1131
1132 @item --m32rx
1133 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1134 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1135
1136 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1137 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1138 encountered.
1139
1140 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1141 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1142 encountered.
1143
1144 @end table
1145 @end ifset
1146
1147 @ifset M680X0
1148 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1149 Motorola 68000 series.
1150
1151 @table @gcctabopt
1152
1153 @item -l
1154 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1155
1156 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1157 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1158 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1159 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1160 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1161
1162 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1163 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1164 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1165 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1166 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1167 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1168
1169 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1170 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1171 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1172
1173 @end table
1174 @end ifset
1175
1176 @ifset NIOSII
1177
1178 @ifclear man
1179 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1180 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1181 @end ifclear
1182
1183 @ifset man
1184 @c man begin OPTIONS
1185 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1186 Altera Nios II processor.
1187 @c man end
1188 @c man begin INCLUDE
1189 @include c-nios2.texi
1190 @c ended inside the included file
1191 @end ifset
1192 @end ifset
1193
1194 @ifset PDP11
1195
1196 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1197 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1198
1199 @table @gcctabopt
1200 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1201 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1202 default is @option{-mpic}.
1203
1204 @item -mall
1205 @itemx -mall-extensions
1206 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1207
1208 @item -mno-extensions
1209 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1210
1211 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1212 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1213
1214 @item -m@var{cpu}
1215 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1216 disable all other extensions.
1217
1218 @item -m@var{machine}
1219 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1220 model, and disable all other extensions.
1221 @end table
1222
1223 @end ifset
1224
1225 @ifset PJ
1226 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1227 a picoJava processor.
1228
1229 @table @gcctabopt
1230
1231 @cindex PJ endianness
1232 @cindex endianness, PJ
1233 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1234 @item -mb
1235 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1236
1237 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1238 @item -ml
1239 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1240
1241 @end table
1242 @end ifset
1243
1244 @ifset PRU
1245
1246 @ifclear man
1247 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1248 for a PRU processor.
1249 @end ifclear
1250
1251 @ifset man
1252 @c man begin OPTIONS
1253 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1254 PRU processor.
1255 @c man end
1256 @c man begin INCLUDE
1257 @include c-pru.texi
1258 @c ended inside the included file
1259 @end ifset
1260 @end ifset
1261
1262 @ifset M68HC11
1263 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1264 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1265
1266 @table @gcctabopt
1267
1268 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1269 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1270 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1271
1272 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1273 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1274 XGATE address space.
1275
1276 @item -mshort
1277 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1278
1279 @item -mlong
1280 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1281
1282 @item -mshort-double
1283 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1284
1285 @item -mlong-double
1286 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1287
1288 @item --force-long-branches
1289 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1290 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1291 sub routine.
1292
1293 @item -S | --short-branches
1294 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1295 when the offset is out of range.
1296
1297 @item --strict-direct-mode
1298 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1299 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1300
1301 @item --print-insn-syntax
1302 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1303
1304 @item --print-opcodes
1305 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1306
1307 @item --generate-example
1308 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1309 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1310
1311 @end table
1312 @end ifset
1313
1314 @ifset SPARC
1315 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1316 for the SPARC architecture:
1317
1318 @table @gcctabopt
1319 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1320 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1321 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1322
1323 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1324 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1325
1326 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1327 UltraSPARC extensions.
1328
1329 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1330 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1331 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1332
1333 @item -bump
1334 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1335 @end table
1336 @end ifset
1337
1338 @ifset TIC54X
1339 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1340 architecture.
1341
1342 @table @gcctabopt
1343 @item -mfar-mode
1344 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1345 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1346 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1347 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1348 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1349 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1350 behaviour in the shell.
1351 @end table
1352 @end ifset
1353
1354 @ifset MIPS
1355 @c man begin OPTIONS
1356 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1357 a MIPS processor.
1358
1359 @table @gcctabopt
1360 @item -G @var{num}
1361 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1362 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1363 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1364
1365 @cindex MIPS endianness
1366 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1367 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1368 @item -EB
1369 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1370
1371 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1372 @item -EL
1373 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1374
1375 @cindex MIPS ISA
1376 @item -mips1
1377 @itemx -mips2
1378 @itemx -mips3
1379 @itemx -mips4
1380 @itemx -mips5
1381 @itemx -mips32
1382 @itemx -mips32r2
1383 @itemx -mips32r3
1384 @itemx -mips32r5
1385 @itemx -mips32r6
1386 @itemx -mips64
1387 @itemx -mips64r2
1388 @itemx -mips64r3
1389 @itemx -mips64r5
1390 @itemx -mips64r6
1391 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1392 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1393 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1394 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1395 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1396 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1397 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1398 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1399 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1400 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1401
1402 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1403 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1404
1405 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1406 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1407
1408 @item -mfix7000
1409 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1410 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1411 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1412
1413 @item -mfix-rm7000
1414 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1415 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1416 followed by a load instruction.
1417
1418 @item -mdebug
1419 @itemx -no-mdebug
1420 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1421 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1422
1423 @item -mpdr
1424 @itemx -mno-pdr
1425 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1426
1427 @item -mgp32
1428 @itemx -mfp32
1429 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1430 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1431 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1432 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1433
1434 @item -mgp64
1435 @itemx -mfp64
1436 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1437 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1438 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1439 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1440
1441 @item -mfpxx
1442 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1443 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1444 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1445 32 or 64 bits wide.
1446
1447 @item -modd-spreg
1448 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1449 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1450 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1451 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1452
1453 @item -mips16
1454 @itemx -no-mips16
1455 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1456 @code{.module mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1457 turns off this option.
1458
1459 @item -mmips16e2
1460 @itemx -mno-mips16e2
1461 Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
1462 to putting @code{.module mips16e2} at the start of the assembly file.
1463 @samp{-mno-mips16e2} turns off this option.
1464
1465 @item -mmicromips
1466 @itemx -mno-micromips
1467 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1468 @code{.module micromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1469 @samp{-mno-micromips} turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
1470 @code{.module nomicromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1471
1472 @item -msmartmips
1473 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1474 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1475 equivalent to putting @code{.module smartmips} at the start of the assembly
1476 file. @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1477
1478 @item -mips3d
1479 @itemx -no-mips3d
1480 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1481 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1482 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1483
1484 @item -mdmx
1485 @itemx -no-mdmx
1486 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1487 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1488 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1489
1490 @item -mdsp
1491 @itemx -mno-dsp
1492 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1493 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1494 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1495
1496 @item -mdspr2
1497 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1498 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1499 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1500 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1501 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1502
1503 @item -mdspr3
1504 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1505 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1506 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1507 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1508 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1509
1510 @item -mmsa
1511 @itemx -mno-msa
1512 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1513 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1514 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1515
1516 @item -mxpa
1517 @itemx -mno-xpa
1518 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1519 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1520 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1521
1522 @item -mmt
1523 @itemx -mno-mt
1524 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1525 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1526 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1527
1528 @item -mmcu
1529 @itemx -mno-mcu
1530 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1531 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1532 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1533
1534 @item -minsn32
1535 @itemx -mno-insn32
1536 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1537 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1538 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1539 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1540 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1541 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1542 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1543
1544 @item --construct-floats
1545 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1546 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1547 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1548 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1549 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1550 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1551
1552 @item --relax-branch
1553 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1554 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1555 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1556 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1557
1558 @item -mignore-branch-isa
1559 @itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1560 Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The
1561 semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1562 most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1563 same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label. Therefore GAS has
1564 checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1565 modes match. @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks. By
1566 default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1567 branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1568
1569 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1570 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1571 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1572
1573 @cindex emulation
1574 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1575 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1576 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1577 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1578 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1579
1580 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1581 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1582 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1583 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1584 preferred options instead.
1585
1586 @item -nocpp
1587 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1588 the native tools.
1589
1590 @item --trap
1591 @itemx --no-trap
1592 @itemx --break
1593 @itemx --no-break
1594 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1595 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1596 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1597 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1598 break exception.
1599
1600 @item -n
1601 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1602 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1603 @end table
1604 @c man end
1605 @end ifset
1606
1607 @ifset MCORE
1608 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1609 an MCore processor.
1610
1611 @table @gcctabopt
1612 @item -jsri2bsr
1613 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1614 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1615 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1616
1617 @item -sifilter
1618 @itemx -nosifilter
1619 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1620 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1621
1622 @item -relax
1623 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1624
1625 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1626 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1627 can be assembled.
1628
1629 @item -EB
1630 Assemble for a big endian target.
1631
1632 @item -EL
1633 Assemble for a little endian target.
1634
1635 @end table
1636 @end ifset
1637 @c man end
1638
1639 @ifset METAG
1640
1641 @ifclear man
1642 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1643 for a Meta processor.
1644 @end ifclear
1645
1646 @ifset man
1647 @c man begin OPTIONS
1648 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1649 Meta processor.
1650 @c man end
1651 @c man begin INCLUDE
1652 @include c-metag.texi
1653 @c ended inside the included file
1654 @end ifset
1655
1656 @end ifset
1657
1658 @c man begin OPTIONS
1659 @ifset MMIX
1660 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1661 @end ifset
1662
1663 @ifset NDS32
1664
1665 @ifclear man
1666 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1667 for a NDS32 processor.
1668 @end ifclear
1669 @c ended inside the included file
1670 @end ifset
1671
1672 @ifset man
1673 @c man begin OPTIONS
1674 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1675 NDS32 processor.
1676 @c man end
1677 @c man begin INCLUDE
1678 @include c-nds32.texi
1679 @c ended inside the included file
1680 @end ifset
1681
1682 @c man end
1683 @ifset PPC
1684
1685 @ifclear man
1686 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1687 for a PowerPC processor.
1688 @end ifclear
1689
1690 @ifset man
1691 @c man begin OPTIONS
1692 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1693 PowerPC processor.
1694 @c man end
1695 @c man begin INCLUDE
1696 @include c-ppc.texi
1697 @c ended inside the included file
1698 @end ifset
1699
1700 @end ifset
1701
1702 @ifset RISCV
1703
1704 @ifclear man
1705 @xref{RISC-V-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1706 for a RISC-V processor.
1707 @end ifclear
1708
1709 @ifset man
1710 @c man begin OPTIONS
1711 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1712 RISC-V processor.
1713 @c man end
1714 @c man begin INCLUDE
1715 @include c-riscv.texi
1716 @c ended inside the included file
1717 @end ifset
1718
1719 @end ifset
1720
1721 @c man begin OPTIONS
1722 @ifset RX
1723 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1724 @end ifset
1725
1726 @ifset S390
1727 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1728 processor family.
1729
1730 @table @gcctabopt
1731 @item -m31
1732 @itemx -m64
1733 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1734 @item -mesa
1735 @item -mzarch
1736 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1737 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1738 @item -march=@var{processor}
1739 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1740 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1741 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1742 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1743 @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), or @samp{z14} (or @samp{arch12}).
1744 @item -mregnames
1745 @itemx -mno-regnames
1746 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1747 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1748 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1749 but evaluates to zero.
1750 @end table
1751 @end ifset
1752 @c man end
1753
1754 @ifset TIC6X
1755
1756 @ifclear man
1757 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1758 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1759 @end ifclear
1760
1761 @ifset man
1762 @c man begin OPTIONS
1763 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1764 TMS320C6000 processor.
1765 @c man end
1766 @c man begin INCLUDE
1767 @include c-tic6x.texi
1768 @c ended inside the included file
1769 @end ifset
1770
1771 @end ifset
1772
1773 @ifset TILEGX
1774
1775 @ifclear man
1776 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1777 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1778 @end ifclear
1779
1780 @ifset man
1781 @c man begin OPTIONS
1782 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1783 processor.
1784 @c man end
1785 @c man begin INCLUDE
1786 @include c-tilegx.texi
1787 @c ended inside the included file
1788 @end ifset
1789
1790 @end ifset
1791
1792 @ifset VISIUM
1793
1794 @ifclear man
1795 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1796 for a Visium processor.
1797 @end ifclear
1798
1799 @ifset man
1800 @c man begin OPTIONS
1801 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1802 processor.
1803 @c man end
1804 @c man begin INCLUDE
1805 @include c-visium.texi
1806 @c ended inside the included file
1807 @end ifset
1808
1809 @end ifset
1810
1811 @ifset XTENSA
1812
1813 @ifclear man
1814 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1815 for an Xtensa processor.
1816 @end ifclear
1817
1818 @ifset man
1819 @c man begin OPTIONS
1820 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1821 Xtensa processor.
1822 @c man end
1823 @c man begin INCLUDE
1824 @include c-xtensa.texi
1825 @c ended inside the included file
1826 @end ifset
1827
1828 @end ifset
1829
1830 @c man begin OPTIONS
1831
1832 @ifset Z80
1833 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1834 a Z80 family processor.
1835 @table @gcctabopt
1836 @item -z80
1837 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1838 @item -r800
1839 Assemble for R800 processor.
1840 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1841 @itemx -Wnud
1842 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1843 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1844 @itemx -Wnup
1845 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1846 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1847 @itemx -Wud
1848 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1849 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1850 @itemx -Wup
1851 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1852 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1853 @itemx -Fud
1854 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1855 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1856 @itemx -Fup
1857 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1858 @end table
1859 @end ifset
1860
1861 @c man end
1862
1863 @menu
1864 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1865 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1866 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1867 * Command Line:: Command Line
1868 * Input Files:: Input Files
1869 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1870 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1871 @end menu
1872
1873 @node Manual
1874 @section Structure of this Manual
1875
1876 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1877 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1878 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1879 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1880 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1881
1882 @ifclear GENERIC
1883 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1884 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1885 @end ifclear
1886 @ifset GENERIC
1887 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1888 various flavors of the assembler.
1889 @end ifset
1890
1891 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1892 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1893 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1894 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1895 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1896 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1897 particular architecture.
1898 @ifset GENERIC
1899 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1900 machine architecture manual for this information.
1901 @end ifset
1902 @ifclear GENERIC
1903 @ifset H8/300
1904 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1905 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1906 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1907 @end ifset
1908 @ifset SH
1909 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1910 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1911 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1912 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1913 @end ifset
1914 @ifset Z8000
1915 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1916 @end ifset
1917 @end ifclear
1918
1919 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1920 @ignore
1921 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1922 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1923 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1924 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1925 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1926 qualification.
1927
1928 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1929 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1930 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1931 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1932 @end ignore
1933
1934 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1935 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1936 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1937 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1938 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1939 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1940 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1941 @c directives).
1942
1943 @node GNU Assembler
1944 @section The GNU Assembler
1945
1946 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1947
1948 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1949 @ifclear GENERIC
1950 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1951 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1952 @end ifclear
1953 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1954 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1955 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1956 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1957 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1958
1959 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1960 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1961 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1962 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1963 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1964 machine would assemble.
1965 @ifset VAX
1966 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1967 @end ifset
1968 @ifset M680X0
1969 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1970 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1971 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1972 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1973 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1974 @end ifset
1975
1976 @c man end
1977
1978 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1979 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1980 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1981
1982 @node Object Formats
1983 @section Object File Formats
1984
1985 @cindex object file format
1986 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1987 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1988 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1989 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1990 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1991 @ifclear GENERIC
1992 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1993 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1994 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1995 @end ifclear
1996 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1997 @ifset I960
1998 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1999 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
2000 @end ifset
2001 @ifset HPPA
2002 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
2003 SOM or ELF format object files.
2004 @end ifset
2005 @end ifclear
2006
2007 @node Command Line
2008 @section Command Line
2009
2010 @cindex command line conventions
2011
2012 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
2013 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
2014 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
2015 significant.
2016
2017 @cindex standard input, as input file
2018 @kindex --
2019 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
2020 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2021
2022 @cindex options, command line
2023 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
2024 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2025 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2026 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2027 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2028
2029 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2030 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2031 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2032 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2033
2034 @smallexample
2035 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2036 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2037 @end smallexample
2038
2039 @node Input Files
2040 @section Input Files
2041
2042 @cindex input
2043 @cindex source program
2044 @cindex files, input
2045 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2046 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2047 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2048 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2049
2050 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2051 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2052 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2053 order specified.
2054
2055 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2056 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2057 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2058 (The standard input is also a file.)
2059
2060 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2061 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2062 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2063 is taken to be an input file name.
2064
2065 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2066 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2067 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2068 to assemble.
2069
2070 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2071 in your command line.
2072
2073 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2074 file.
2075
2076 @c man end
2077
2078 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2079
2080 @cindex input file linenumbers
2081 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2082 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2083 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2084 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2085 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2086
2087 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2088 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2089
2090 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2091 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2092 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2093 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2094 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2095 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2096
2097 @node Object
2098 @section Output (Object) File
2099
2100 @cindex object file
2101 @cindex output file
2102 @kindex a.out
2103 @kindex .o
2104 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2105 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2106 is the object file. Its default name is
2107 @ifclear BOUT
2108 @code{a.out}.
2109 @end ifclear
2110 @ifset BOUT
2111 @ifset GENERIC
2112 @code{a.out}, or
2113 @end ifset
2114 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2115 @end ifset
2116 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2117 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2118 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2119 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2120 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2121
2122 @cindex linker
2123 @kindex ld
2124 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2125 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2126 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2127 information for the debugger.
2128
2129 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2130 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2131
2132 @node Errors
2133 @section Error and Warning Messages
2134
2135 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2136
2137 @cindex error messages
2138 @cindex warning messages
2139 @cindex messages from assembler
2140 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2141 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2142 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2143 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2144 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2145
2146 @c man end
2147
2148 @cindex format of warning messages
2149 Warning messages have the format
2150
2151 @smallexample
2152 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2153 @end smallexample
2154
2155 @noindent
2156 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2157 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2158 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2159 @ifset GENERIC
2160 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2161 @end ifset
2162 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2163 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2164 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2165
2166 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2167 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2168
2169 @smallexample
2170 .file 2 "bar.c"
2171 error_assembler_source
2172 .file "foo.c"
2173 .line 30
2174 error_c_source
2175 @end smallexample
2176
2177 produces this output:
2178
2179 @smallexample
2180 Assembler messages:
2181 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2182 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2183 @end smallexample
2184
2185 @cindex format of error messages
2186 Error messages have the format
2187
2188 @smallexample
2189 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2190 @end smallexample
2191
2192 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2193 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2194 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2195
2196 @node Invoking
2197 @chapter Command-Line Options
2198
2199 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2200 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2201 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2202 for options specific
2203 @ifclear GENERIC
2204 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2205 @end ifclear
2206 @ifset GENERIC
2207 to particular machine architectures.
2208 @end ifset
2209
2210 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2211
2212 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2213 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2214 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2215 by commas. For example:
2216
2217 @smallexample
2218 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2219 @end smallexample
2220
2221 @noindent
2222 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2223 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2224 local symbols in the symbol table).
2225
2226 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2227 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2228 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2229 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2230 assembler.)
2231
2232 @c man end
2233
2234 @menu
2235 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2236 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2237 * D:: -D for compatibility
2238 * f:: -f to work faster
2239 * I:: -I for .include search path
2240 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2241 * K:: -K for compatibility
2242 @end ifclear
2243 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2244 * K:: -K for difference tables
2245 @end ifset
2246
2247 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2248 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2249 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2250 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2251 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2252 * o:: -o to name the object file
2253 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2254 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2255 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2256 * v:: -v to announce version
2257 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2258 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2259 @end menu
2260
2261 @node a
2262 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2263
2264 @kindex -a
2265 @kindex -ac
2266 @kindex -ad
2267 @kindex -ag
2268 @kindex -ah
2269 @kindex -al
2270 @kindex -an
2271 @kindex -as
2272 @cindex listings, enabling
2273 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2274
2275 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2276 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2277 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2278 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2279 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2280 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2281 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2282 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2283 also.
2284
2285 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2286 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2287
2288 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2289 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2290 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2291 omitted from the listing.
2292
2293 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2294 listing.
2295
2296 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2297 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2298 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2299 @code{.sbttl}.
2300 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2301 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2302 listing-control directives have no effect.
2303
2304 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2305 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2306
2307 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2308 because it
2309 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2310 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2311 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2312 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2313 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2314
2315 @node alternate
2316 @section @option{--alternate}
2317
2318 @kindex --alternate
2319 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2320
2321 @node D
2322 @section @option{-D}
2323
2324 @kindex -D
2325 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2326 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2327 @command{@value{AS}}.
2328
2329 @node f
2330 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2331
2332 @kindex -f
2333 @cindex trusted compiler
2334 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2335 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2336 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2337 and comment preprocessing on
2338 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2339 ,Preprocessing}.
2340
2341 @quotation
2342 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2343 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2344 not work correctly.
2345 @end quotation
2346
2347 @node I
2348 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2349
2350 @kindex -I @var{path}
2351 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2352 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2353 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2354 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2355 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2356 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2357 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2358 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2359 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2360 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2361
2362 @node K
2363 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2364
2365 @kindex -K
2366 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2367 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2368 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2369 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2370 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2371 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2372 alteration on other platforms.
2373 @end ifclear
2374
2375 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2376 @cindex difference tables, warning
2377 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2378 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2379 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2380 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2381 is done.
2382 @end ifset
2383
2384 @node L
2385 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2386
2387 @kindex -L
2388 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2389 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2390 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2391 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2392 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2393 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2394 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2395 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2396
2397 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2398 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2399 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2400
2401 @node listing
2402 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2403
2404 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2405 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2406 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2407 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2408 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2409 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2410 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2411 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2412
2413 @table @gcctabopt
2414 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2415 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2416 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2417 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2418 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2419
2420 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2421 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2422 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2423 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2424 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2425 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2426 switch is used the default is to one.
2427
2428 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2429 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2430 @cindex Width of source line output
2431 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2432 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2433 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2434
2435 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2436 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2437 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2438 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2439 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2440 @end table
2441
2442 @node M
2443 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2444
2445 @kindex -M
2446 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2447 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2448 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2449 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2450 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2451 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2452 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2453 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2454 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2455
2456 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2457 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2458 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2459 individually. These are:
2460
2461 @itemize @bullet
2462 @item global symbols in common section
2463
2464 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2465 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2466 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2467 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2468 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2469
2470 @item complex relocations
2471
2472 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2473 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2474 are not support by other object file formats.
2475
2476 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2477
2478 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2479 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2480 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2481 script.
2482
2483 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2484
2485 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2486 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2487
2488 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2489
2490 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2491 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2492 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2493 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2494 assigned within a linker script.
2495 @end itemize
2496
2497 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2498 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2499 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2500
2501 @itemize @bullet
2502
2503 @item EBCDIC strings
2504
2505 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2506
2507 @item packed binary coded decimal
2508
2509 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2510 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2511
2512 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2513
2514 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2515
2516 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2517
2518 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2519
2520 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2521
2522 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2523 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2524 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2525 these options serve no purpose.
2526
2527 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2528
2529 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2530 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2531 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2532
2533 @item other @code{OPT} options
2534
2535 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2536 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2537
2538 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2539
2540 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2541 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2542
2543 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2544
2545 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2546
2547 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2548
2549 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2550
2551 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2552
2553 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2554
2555 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2556
2557 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2558
2559 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2560
2561 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2562
2563 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2564
2565 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2566
2567 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2568
2569 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2570
2571 @end itemize
2572
2573 @node MD
2574 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2575
2576 @kindex --MD
2577 @cindex dependency tracking
2578 @cindex make rules
2579
2580 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2581 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2582 dependencies of the main source file.
2583
2584 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2585
2586 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2587
2588 @node no-pad-sections
2589 @section Output Section Padding
2590 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2591 @cindex output section padding
2592 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2593 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2594 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2595 disable this behaviour.
2596
2597 @node o
2598 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2599
2600 @kindex -o
2601 @cindex naming object file
2602 @cindex object file name
2603 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2604 default it has the name
2605 @ifset GENERIC
2606 @ifset I960
2607 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2608 @end ifset
2609 @ifclear I960
2610 @file{a.out}.
2611 @end ifclear
2612 @end ifset
2613 @ifclear GENERIC
2614 @ifset I960
2615 @file{b.out}.
2616 @end ifset
2617 @ifclear I960
2618 @file{a.out}.
2619 @end ifclear
2620 @end ifclear
2621 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2622 object file a different name.
2623
2624 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2625 existing file of the same name.
2626
2627 @node R
2628 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2629
2630 @kindex -R
2631 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2632 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2633 @cindex joining text and data sections
2634 @cindex merging text and data sections
2635 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2636 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2637 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2638 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2639 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2640 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2641
2642 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2643 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2644 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2645 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2646
2647 @ifset COFF-ELF
2648 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2649 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2650 @samp{.data}.
2651 @end ifset
2652
2653 @ifset HPPA
2654 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2655 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2656 @end ifset
2657
2658 @node statistics
2659 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2660
2661 @kindex --statistics
2662 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2663 @cindex time, total for assembly
2664 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2665 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2666 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2667 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2668 seconds).
2669
2670 @node traditional-format
2671 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2672
2673 @kindex --traditional-format
2674 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2675 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2676 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2677
2678 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2679 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2680
2681 @node v
2682 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2683
2684 @kindex -v
2685 @kindex -version
2686 @cindex assembler version
2687 @cindex version of assembler
2688 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2689 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2690 command line.
2691
2692 @node W
2693 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2694
2695 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2696 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2697 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2698 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2699
2700 @kindex -W
2701 @kindex --no-warn
2702 @cindex suppressing warnings
2703 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2704 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2705 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2706 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2707 are still reported.
2708
2709 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2710 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2711 @cindex warnings, causing error
2712 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2713 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2714
2715 @kindex --warn
2716 @cindex warnings, switching on
2717 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2718 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2719
2720 @node Z
2721 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2722 @cindex object file, after errors
2723 @cindex errors, continuing after
2724 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2725 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2726 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2727 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2728 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2729 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2730
2731 @node Syntax
2732 @chapter Syntax
2733
2734 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2735 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2736 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2737 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2738 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2739 @ifclear VAX
2740 assembler.
2741 @end ifclear
2742 @ifset VAX
2743 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2744 @end ifset
2745
2746 @menu
2747 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2748 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2749 * Comments:: Comments
2750 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2751 * Statements:: Statements
2752 * Constants:: Constants
2753 @end menu
2754
2755 @node Preprocessing
2756 @section Preprocessing
2757
2758 @cindex preprocessing
2759 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2760 @itemize @bullet
2761 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2762 @item
2763 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2764 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2765 a single space.
2766
2767 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2768 @item
2769 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2770 appropriate number of newlines.
2771
2772 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2773 @item
2774 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2775 @end itemize
2776
2777 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2778 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2779 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2780 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2781 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2782 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2783 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2784
2785 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2786 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2787 preprocessed.
2788
2789 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2790 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2791 @kindex #NO_APP
2792 @kindex #APP
2793 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2794 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2795 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2796 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2797 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2798 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2799 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2800 and whitespace.
2801
2802 @node Whitespace
2803 @section Whitespace
2804
2805 @cindex whitespace
2806 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2807 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2808 people to read. Unless within character constants
2809 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2810 as exactly one space.
2811
2812 @node Comments
2813 @section Comments
2814
2815 @cindex comments
2816 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2817 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2818
2819 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2820 This means you may not nest these comments.
2821
2822 @smallexample
2823 /*
2824 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2825 is to use this sort of comment.
2826 */
2827
2828 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2829 @end smallexample
2830
2831 @cindex line comment character
2832 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2833 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2834 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2835 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2836 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2837 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2838 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2839 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2840
2841 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2842 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2843 to specify logical line numbers:
2844
2845 @kindex #
2846 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2847 @cindex logical line numbers
2848 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2849 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2850 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2851 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2852 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2853
2854 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2855 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2856
2857 @smallexample
2858 # This is an ordinary comment.
2859 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2860 # This is logical line # 36.
2861 @end smallexample
2862 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2863 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2864
2865 @node Symbol Intro
2866 @section Symbols
2867
2868 @cindex characters used in symbols
2869 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2870 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2871 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2872 @samp{_.$}.
2873 @end ifclear
2874 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2875 @ifclear GENERIC
2876 @ifset H8
2877 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2878 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2879 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2880 symbol names.)
2881 @end ifset
2882 @end ifclear
2883 @end ifset
2884 @ifset GENERIC
2885 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2886 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2887 @end ifset
2888 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2889 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2890 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2891 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2892 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2893
2894 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2895 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2896 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2897 backslash @code{\} character.
2898 @cindex length of symbols
2899
2900 @node Statements
2901 @section Statements
2902
2903 @cindex statements, structure of
2904 @cindex line separator character
2905 @cindex statement separator character
2906
2907 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2908 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2909 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2910 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2911 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2912 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2913 exception: they do not end statements.
2914
2915 @cindex newline, required at file end
2916 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2917 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2918 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2919
2920 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2921
2922 @cindex instructions and directives
2923 @cindex directives and instructions
2924 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2925 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2926 @c 13feb91.
2927 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2928 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2929 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2930 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2931 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2932 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2933 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2934 @ifset GENERIC
2935 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2936 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2937 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2938 language.@refill
2939 @end ifset
2940
2941 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2942 @cindex label (@code{:})
2943 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2944 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2945 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2946
2947 @ifset HPPA
2948 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2949 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2950 only one label may be defined on each line.
2951 @end ifset
2952
2953 @smallexample
2954 label: .directive followed by something
2955 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2956 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2957 @end smallexample
2958
2959 @node Constants
2960 @section Constants
2961
2962 @cindex constants
2963 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2964 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2965 @smallexample
2966 @group
2967 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2968 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2969 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2970 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2971 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2972 @end group
2973 @end smallexample
2974
2975 @menu
2976 * Characters:: Character Constants
2977 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2978 @end menu
2979
2980 @node Characters
2981 @subsection Character Constants
2982
2983 @cindex character constants
2984 @cindex constants, character
2985 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2986 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2987 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2988 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2989 used in arithmetic expressions.
2990
2991 @menu
2992 * Strings:: Strings
2993 * Chars:: Characters
2994 @end menu
2995
2996 @node Strings
2997 @subsubsection Strings
2998
2999 @cindex string constants
3000 @cindex constants, string
3001 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
3002 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
3003 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
3004 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
3005 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
3006 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
3007 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
3008 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
3009
3010 @cindex escape codes, character
3011 @cindex character escape codes
3012 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
3013 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
3014 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
3015 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
3016 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
3017 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
3018 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
3019 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
3020 @table @kbd
3021 @c @item \a
3022 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
3023 @c
3024 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
3025 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
3026 @item \b
3027 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
3028
3029 @c @item \e
3030 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
3031 @c
3032 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
3033 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3034 @item backslash-f
3035 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3036
3037 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3038 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
3039 @item \n
3040 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3041
3042 @c @item \p
3043 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3044 @c
3045 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3046 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3047 @item \r
3048 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3049
3050 @c @item \s
3051 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3052 @c other assemblers.
3053 @c
3054 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3055 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3056 @item \t
3057 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3058
3059 @c @item \v
3060 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3061 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3062 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3063 @c
3064 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3065 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3066 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3067 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3068 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3069 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3070
3071 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3072 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3073 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3074 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3075 lower case @code{x} works.
3076
3077 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3078 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3079 @item \\
3080 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3081
3082 @c @item \'
3083 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3084 @c This is needed in single character literals
3085 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3086 @c a @samp{'}.
3087 @c
3088 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3089 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3090 @item \"
3091 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3092 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3093
3094 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3095 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3096 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3097 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3098 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3099 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3100 code and warns you of the fact.
3101 @end table
3102
3103 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3104 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3105 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3106 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3107 sequence.
3108
3109 @node Chars
3110 @subsubsection Characters
3111
3112 @cindex single character constant
3113 @cindex character, single
3114 @cindex constant, single character
3115 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3116 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3117 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3118 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3119 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3120 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3121 accent. A newline
3122 @ifclear GENERIC
3123 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3124 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3125 @end ifclear
3126 @ifset abnormal-separator
3127 @ifset H8
3128 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3129 Renesas SH)
3130 @end ifset
3131 @end ifset
3132 @end ifclear
3133 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3134 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3135 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3136 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3137 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3138
3139 @node Numbers
3140 @subsection Number Constants
3141
3142 @cindex constants, number
3143 @cindex number constants
3144 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3145 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3146 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3147 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3148 are floating point numbers, described below.
3149
3150 @menu
3151 * Integers:: Integers
3152 * Bignums:: Bignums
3153 * Flonums:: Flonums
3154 @ifclear GENERIC
3155 @ifset I960
3156 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3157 @end ifset
3158 @end ifclear
3159 @end menu
3160
3161 @node Integers
3162 @subsubsection Integers
3163 @cindex integers
3164 @cindex constants, integer
3165
3166 @cindex binary integers
3167 @cindex integers, binary
3168 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3169 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3170
3171 @cindex octal integers
3172 @cindex integers, octal
3173 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3174 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3175
3176 @cindex decimal integers
3177 @cindex integers, decimal
3178 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3179 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3180
3181 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3182 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3183 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3184 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3185
3186 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3187 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3188 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3189
3190 @node Bignums
3191 @subsubsection Bignums
3192
3193 @cindex bignums
3194 @cindex constants, bignum
3195 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3196 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3197 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3198 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3199
3200 @node Flonums
3201 @subsubsection Flonums
3202 @cindex flonums
3203 @cindex floating point numbers
3204 @cindex constants, floating point
3205
3206 @cindex precision, floating point
3207 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3208 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3209 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3210 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3211 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3212 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3213
3214 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3215 @itemize @bullet
3216 @item
3217 The digit @samp{0}.
3218 @ifset HPPA
3219 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3220 @end ifset
3221
3222 @item
3223 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3224 @ifset GENERIC
3225 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3226 @ignore
3227 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3228 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3229 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3230 @end ignore
3231
3232 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3233 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3234 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3235
3236 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3237 (in upper or lower case).
3238
3239 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3240 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3241
3242 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3243 @end ifset
3244 @ifclear GENERIC
3245 @ifset ARC
3246 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3247 @end ifset
3248 @ifset H8
3249 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3250 @end ifset
3251 @ifset HPPA
3252 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3253 @end ifset
3254 @ifset I960
3255 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3256 @end ifset
3257 @end ifclear
3258
3259 @item
3260 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3261
3262 @item
3263 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3264
3265 @item
3266 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3267 or more decimal digits.
3268
3269 @item
3270 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3271
3272 @itemize @bullet
3273 @item
3274 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3275 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3276 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3277 @item
3278 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3279 @item
3280 One or more decimal digits.
3281 @end itemize
3282
3283 @end itemize
3284
3285 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3286 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3287
3288 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3289 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3290 @command{@value{AS}}.
3291
3292 @ifclear GENERIC
3293 @ifset I960
3294 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3295 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3296 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3297 @node Bit Fields
3298 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3299
3300 @cindex bit fields
3301 @cindex constants, bit field
3302 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3303 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3304 @example
3305 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3306 @end example
3307 @noindent
3308 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3309 @var{value}.
3310
3311 The resulting number is then packed
3312 @ifset GENERIC
3313 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3314 (in host-dependent byte order)
3315 @end ifset
3316 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3317 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3318 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3319 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3320 least significant digits.@refill
3321
3322 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3323 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3324 @end ifset
3325 @end ifclear
3326
3327 @node Sections
3328 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3329 @cindex sections
3330 @cindex relocation
3331
3332 @menu
3333 * Secs Background:: Background
3334 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3335 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3336 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3337 * bss:: bss Section
3338 @end menu
3339
3340 @node Secs Background
3341 @section Background
3342
3343 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3344 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3345 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3346
3347 @cindex linker, and assembler
3348 @cindex assembler, and linker
3349 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3350 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3351 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3352 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3353 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3354 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3355 sections.
3356
3357 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3358 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3359 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3360 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3361 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3362 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3363 the proper run-time addresses.
3364 @ifset H8
3365 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3366 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3367 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3368 @end ifset
3369
3370 @cindex standard assembler sections
3371 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3372 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3373 @dfn{bss} sections.
3374
3375 @ifset COFF-ELF
3376 @ifset GENERIC
3377 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3378 @end ifset
3379 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3380 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3381 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3382 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3383 @end ifset
3384
3385 @ifset HPPA
3386 @ifset GENERIC
3387 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3388 @end ifset
3389 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3390 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3391 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3392 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3393 assembler directives.
3394
3395 @ifset SOM
3396 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3397 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3398 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3399 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3400 @end ifset
3401 @end ifset
3402
3403 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3404 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3405
3406 @ifset HPPA
3407 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3408 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3409 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3410 @end ifset
3411
3412 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3413 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3414 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3415 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3416 file is mentioned:
3417 @itemize @bullet
3418 @item
3419 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3420 an address?
3421 @item
3422 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3423 @item
3424 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3425 @display
3426 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3427 @end display
3428 @item
3429 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3430 @end itemize
3431
3432 @cindex addresses, format of
3433 @cindex section-relative addressing
3434 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3435 @display
3436 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3437 @end display
3438 @noindent
3439 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3440 nature.
3441 @ifset SOM
3442 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3443 symbol-relative instead.)
3444 @end ifset
3445
3446 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3447 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3448
3449 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3450 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3451 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3452 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3453 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3454 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3455 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3456 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3457 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3458
3459 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3460 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3461 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3462 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3463 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3464 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3465 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3466
3467 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3468 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3469 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3470 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3471 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3472 data and bss sections.
3473
3474 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3475 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3476
3477 @node Ld Sections
3478 @section Linker Sections
3479 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3480
3481 @table @strong
3482
3483 @ifset COFF-ELF
3484 @cindex named sections
3485 @cindex sections, named
3486 @item named sections
3487 @end ifset
3488 @ifset aout-bout
3489 @cindex text section
3490 @cindex data section
3491 @itemx text section
3492 @itemx data section
3493 @end ifset
3494 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3495 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3496 true of another.
3497 @c @ifset aout-bout
3498 When the program is running, however, it is
3499 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3500 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3501 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3502 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3503 in the data section.
3504 @c @end ifset
3505
3506 @cindex bss section
3507 @item bss section
3508 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3509 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3510 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3511 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3512 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3513 those explicit zeros from object files.
3514
3515 @cindex absolute section
3516 @item absolute section
3517 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3518 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3519 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3520 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3521
3522 @cindex undefined section
3523 @item undefined section
3524 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3525 the preceding sections.
3526 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3527 @end table
3528
3529 @cindex relocation example
3530 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3531 @ifset COFF-ELF
3532 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3533 @end ifset
3534 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3535
3536 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3537 @ifnottex
3538 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3539 @smallexample
3540 +-----+----+--+
3541 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3542 +-----+----+--+
3543
3544 text data bss
3545 seg. seg. seg.
3546
3547 +---+---+---+
3548 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3549 +---+---+---+
3550
3551 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3552 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3553 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3554
3555 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3556 @end smallexample
3557 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3558 @end ifnottex
3559 @need 5000
3560 @tex
3561 \bigskip
3562 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3563 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3564 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3565
3566 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3567 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3568 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3569
3570 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3571 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3572 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3573 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3574 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3575
3576 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3577 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3578
3579 @end tex
3580 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3581
3582 @node As Sections
3583 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3584
3585 @cindex internal assembler sections
3586 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3587 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3588 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3589 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3590 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3591 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3592 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3593 section-relative address.
3594
3595 @table @b
3596 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3597 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3598 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3599 bug in the assembler.
3600
3601 @cindex expr (internal section)
3602 @item expr section
3603 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3604 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3605 it in the expr section.
3606 @c FIXME item debug
3607 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3608 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3609 @c FIXME item register
3610 @end table
3611
3612 @node Sub-Sections
3613 @section Sub-Sections
3614
3615 @cindex numbered subsections
3616 @cindex grouping data
3617 @ifset aout-bout
3618 Assembled bytes
3619 @ifset COFF-ELF
3620 conventionally
3621 @end ifset
3622 fall into two sections: text and data.
3623 @end ifset
3624 You may have separate groups of
3625 @ifset GENERIC
3626 data in named sections
3627 @end ifset
3628 @ifclear GENERIC
3629 @ifclear aout-bout
3630 data in named sections
3631 @end ifclear
3632 @ifset aout-bout
3633 text or data
3634 @end ifset
3635 @end ifclear
3636 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3637 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3638 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3639 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3640 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3641 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3642 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3643 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3644 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3645 constants being output.
3646
3647 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3648 goes in subsection number zero.
3649
3650 @ifset GENERIC
3651 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3652 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3653 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3654 @end ifset
3655 @ifclear GENERIC
3656 @ifset H8
3657 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3658 boundary (two bytes).
3659 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3660 @end ifset
3661 @ifset I960
3662 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3663 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3664 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3665 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3666 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3667 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3668 @end ifset
3669 @end ifclear
3670
3671 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3672 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3673 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3674 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3675 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3676 data subsections as a data section.
3677
3678 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3679 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3680 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3681 @ifset COFF
3682 @ifset GENERIC
3683 When generating COFF output, you
3684 @end ifset
3685 @ifclear GENERIC
3686 You
3687 @end ifclear
3688 can also use an extra subsection
3689 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3690 @var{expression}}.
3691 @end ifset
3692 @ifset ELF
3693 @ifset GENERIC
3694 When generating ELF output, you
3695 @end ifset
3696 @ifclear GENERIC
3697 You
3698 @end ifclear
3699 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3700 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3701 @end ifset
3702 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3703 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3704 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3705 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3706 @smallexample
3707 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3708 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3709 .text 1
3710 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3711 .data 0
3712 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3713 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3714 .text 0
3715 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3716 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3717 @end smallexample
3718
3719 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3720 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3721 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3722 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3723 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3724 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3725 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3726
3727 @node bss
3728 @section bss Section
3729
3730 @cindex bss section
3731 @cindex common variable storage
3732 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3733 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3734 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3735 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3736 section are zeroed bytes.
3737
3738 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3739 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3740
3741 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3742 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3743
3744 @ifset GENERIC
3745 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3746 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3747 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3748 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3749 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3750 @end ifset
3751
3752 @node Symbols
3753 @chapter Symbols
3754
3755 @cindex symbols
3756 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3757 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3758 to debug.
3759
3760 @quotation
3761 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3762 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3763 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3764 @end quotation
3765
3766 @menu
3767 * Labels:: Labels
3768 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3769 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3770 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3771 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3772 @end menu
3773
3774 @node Labels
3775 @section Labels
3776
3777 @cindex labels
3778 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3779 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3780 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3781 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3782 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3783 definitions.
3784
3785 @ifset HPPA
3786 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3787 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3788 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3789 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3790 @end ifset
3791
3792 @node Setting Symbols
3793 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3794
3795 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3796 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3797 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3798 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3799 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3800 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3801 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3802 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3803
3804 @ifset Blackfin
3805 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3806 @end ifset
3807
3808 @node Symbol Names
3809 @section Symbol Names
3810
3811 @cindex symbol names
3812 @cindex names, symbol
3813 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3814 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3815 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3816 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3817 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3818 particular target machine), and underscores.
3819 @end ifclear
3820 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3821 @ifset H8
3822 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3823 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3824 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3825 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3826 @end ifset
3827 @end ifset
3828
3829 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3830 than @code{Foo}.
3831
3832 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3833 Local Labels. See below.
3834
3835 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3836 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3837 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3838 currently supported.
3839
3840 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3841 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3842 in a program.
3843
3844 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3845
3846 @cindex local symbol names
3847 @cindex symbol names, local
3848 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3849 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3850 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3851 set of local label prefixes.
3852 @ifset HPPA
3853 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3854 @end ifset
3855
3856 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3857 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3858 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3859 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3860
3861 @subheading Local Labels
3862
3863 @cindex local labels
3864 @cindex temporary symbol names
3865 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3866 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3867 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3868 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3869 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3870 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3871 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3872 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3873 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3874 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3875
3876 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3877 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3878 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3879 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3880 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3881 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3882 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3883
3884 Here is an example:
3885
3886 @smallexample
3887 1: branch 1f
3888 2: branch 1b
3889 1: branch 2f
3890 2: branch 1b
3891 @end smallexample
3892
3893 Which is the equivalent of:
3894
3895 @smallexample
3896 label_1: branch label_3
3897 label_2: branch label_1
3898 label_3: branch label_4
3899 label_4: branch label_3
3900 @end smallexample
3901
3902 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3903 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3904 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3905 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3906 these parts:
3907
3908 @table @code
3909 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3910 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3911 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3912 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3913 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3914 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3915 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3916 you may use them in debugging.
3917
3918 @item @var{number}
3919 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3920 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3921
3922 @item @kbd{C-B}
3923 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3924 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3925
3926 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3927 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3928 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3929 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3930 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3931 @end table
3932
3933 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3934 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3935
3936 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3937 @cindex dollar local symbols
3938
3939 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3940 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3941 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3942 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3943 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3944 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3945
3946 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3947 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3948 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3949
3950 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3951 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3952 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3953 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3954
3955 @node Dot
3956 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3957
3958 @cindex dot (symbol)
3959 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3960 @cindex current address
3961 @cindex location counter
3962 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3963 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3964 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3965 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3966 directive.
3967 @ifclear no-space-dir
3968 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3969 @samp{.space 4}.
3970 @end ifclear
3971
3972 @node Symbol Attributes
3973 @section Symbol Attributes
3974
3975 @cindex symbol attributes
3976 @cindex attributes, symbol
3977 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3978 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3979 attributes.
3980 @ifset INTERNALS
3981 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3982 @end ifset
3983
3984 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3985 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3986 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3987 would want.
3988
3989 @menu
3990 * Symbol Value:: Value
3991 * Symbol Type:: Type
3992 @ifset aout-bout
3993 @ifset GENERIC
3994 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3995 @end ifset
3996 @ifclear GENERIC
3997 @ifclear BOUT
3998 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3999 @end ifclear
4000 @ifset BOUT
4001 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
4002 @end ifset
4003 @end ifclear
4004 @end ifset
4005 @ifset COFF
4006 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
4007 @end ifset
4008 @ifset SOM
4009 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
4010 @end ifset
4011 @end menu
4012
4013 @node Symbol Value
4014 @subsection Value
4015
4016 @cindex value of a symbol
4017 @cindex symbol value
4018 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
4019 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
4020 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
4021 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
4022 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
4023 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
4024 called absolute.
4025
4026 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
4027 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
4028 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
4029 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
4030 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
4031 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
4032 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
4033 allocated storage.
4034
4035 @node Symbol Type
4036 @subsection Type
4037
4038 @cindex type of a symbol
4039 @cindex symbol type
4040 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4041 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4042 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
4043 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4044
4045 @ifset aout-bout
4046 @ifclear GENERIC
4047 @ifset BOUT
4048 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
4049 @c better if it were available outside examples.
4050 @need 1000
4051 @node a.out Symbols
4052 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
4053
4054 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
4055 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
4056 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
4057 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
4058 @code{b.out}.
4059
4060 @end ifset
4061 @ifclear BOUT
4062 @node a.out Symbols
4063 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4064
4065 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4066 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4067
4068 @end ifclear
4069 @end ifclear
4070 @ifset GENERIC
4071 @node a.out Symbols
4072 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4073
4074 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4075 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4076
4077 @end ifset
4078 @menu
4079 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4080 * Symbol Other:: Other
4081 @end menu
4082
4083 @node Symbol Desc
4084 @subsubsection Descriptor
4085
4086 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4087 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4088 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4089 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4090 @command{@value{AS}}.
4091
4092 @node Symbol Other
4093 @subsubsection Other
4094
4095 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4096 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4097 @end ifset
4098
4099 @ifset COFF
4100 @node COFF Symbols
4101 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4102
4103 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4104 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4105
4106 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4107 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4108 @code{.endef} directives.
4109
4110 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4111
4112 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4113 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4114 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4115
4116 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4117
4118 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4119 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4120 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4121 table information for COFF.
4122 @end ifset
4123
4124 @ifset SOM
4125 @node SOM Symbols
4126 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4127
4128 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4129 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4130
4131 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4132 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4133
4134 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4135 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4136 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4137 @end ifset
4138
4139 @node Expressions
4140 @chapter Expressions
4141
4142 @cindex expressions
4143 @cindex addresses
4144 @cindex numeric values
4145 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4146 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4147
4148 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4149 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4150 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4151 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4152 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4153 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4154
4155 @menu
4156 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4157 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4158 @end menu
4159
4160 @node Empty Exprs
4161 @section Empty Expressions
4162
4163 @cindex empty expressions
4164 @cindex expressions, empty
4165 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4166 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4167 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4168 is compatible with other assemblers.
4169
4170 @node Integer Exprs
4171 @section Integer Expressions
4172
4173 @cindex integer expressions
4174 @cindex expressions, integer
4175 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4176 by @emph{operators}.
4177
4178 @menu
4179 * Arguments:: Arguments
4180 * Operators:: Operators
4181 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4182 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4183 @end menu
4184
4185 @node Arguments
4186 @subsection Arguments
4187
4188 @cindex expression arguments
4189 @cindex arguments in expressions
4190 @cindex operands in expressions
4191 @cindex arithmetic operands
4192 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4193 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4194 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4195 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4196 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4197 instruction operands.
4198
4199 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4200 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4201 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4202 integer.
4203
4204 Numbers are usually integers.
4205
4206 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4207 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4208 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4209 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4210 assemblers.
4211
4212 @cindex subexpressions
4213 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4214 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4215 operator followed by an argument.
4216
4217 @node Operators
4218 @subsection Operators
4219
4220 @cindex operators, in expressions
4221 @cindex arithmetic functions
4222 @cindex functions, in expressions
4223 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4224 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4225 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4226 whitespace.
4227
4228 @node Prefix Ops
4229 @subsection Prefix Operator
4230
4231 @cindex prefix operators
4232 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4233 one argument, which must be absolute.
4234
4235 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4236 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4237 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4238 @tex
4239 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4240 @end tex
4241
4242 @table @code
4243 @item -
4244 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4245 @item ~
4246 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4247 @end table
4248
4249 @tex
4250 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4251 @end tex
4252
4253 @node Infix Ops
4254 @subsection Infix Operators
4255
4256 @cindex infix operators
4257 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4258 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4259 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4260 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4261 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4262
4263 @enumerate
4264 @cindex operator precedence
4265 @cindex precedence of operators
4266
4267 @item
4268 Highest Precedence
4269
4270 @table @code
4271 @item *
4272 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4273
4274 @item /
4275 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4276
4277 @item %
4278 @dfn{Remainder}.
4279
4280 @item <<
4281 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4282
4283 @item >>
4284 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4285 @end table
4286
4287 @item
4288 Intermediate precedence
4289
4290 @table @code
4291 @item |
4292
4293 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4294
4295 @item &
4296 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4297
4298 @item ^
4299 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4300
4301 @item !
4302 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4303 @end table
4304
4305 @item
4306 Low Precedence
4307
4308 @table @code
4309 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4310 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4311 @cindex arguments for addition
4312 @item +
4313 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4314 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4315 sections.
4316
4317 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4318 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4319 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4320 @item -
4321 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4322 result has the section of the left argument.
4323 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4324 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4325 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4326
4327 @cindex comparison expressions
4328 @cindex expressions, comparison
4329 @item ==
4330 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4331 @item <>
4332 @itemx !=
4333 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4334 @item <
4335 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4336 @item >
4337 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4338 @item >=
4339 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4340 @item <=
4341 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4342
4343 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4344 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4345 perform signed comparisons.
4346 @end table
4347
4348 @item Lowest Precedence
4349
4350 @table @code
4351 @item &&
4352 @dfn{Logical And}.
4353
4354 @item ||
4355 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4356
4357 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4358 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4359 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4360 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4361
4362 @end table
4363 @end enumerate
4364
4365 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4366 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4367
4368 @node Pseudo Ops
4369 @chapter Assembler Directives
4370
4371 @cindex directives, machine independent
4372 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4373 @cindex machine independent directives
4374 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4375 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4376 in lower case.
4377
4378 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4379 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4380 @ifset GENERIC
4381 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4382 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4383 @end ifset
4384 @ifclear GENERIC
4385 @ifset machine-directives
4386 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4387 @end ifset
4388 @end ifclear
4389
4390 @menu
4391 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4392 @ifset COFF
4393 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4394 @end ifset
4395
4396 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4397 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4398 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4399 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4400 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4401 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4402 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4403 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4404 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4405 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4406 @ifset COFF
4407 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4408 @end ifset
4409 @ifset aout-bout
4410 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4411 @end ifset
4412 @ifset COFF
4413 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4414 @end ifset
4415
4416 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4417 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4418 * Else:: @code{.else}
4419 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4420 * End:: @code{.end}
4421 @ifset COFF
4422 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4423 @end ifset
4424
4425 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4426 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4427 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4428 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4429 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4430 * Err:: @code{.err}
4431 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4432 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4433 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4434 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4435 * File:: @code{.file}
4436 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4437 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4438 * Func:: @code{.func}
4439 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4440 @ifset ELF
4441 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4442 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4443 @end ifset
4444
4445 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4446 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4447 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4448 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4449 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4450 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4451 @ifset ELF
4452 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4453 @end ifset
4454
4455 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4456 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4457 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4458 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4459 @ifclear no-line-dir
4460 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4461 @end ifclear
4462
4463 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4464 * List:: @code{.list}
4465 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4466 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4467 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4468 @ifset ELF
4469 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4470 @end ifset
4471
4472 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4473 @ignore
4474 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4475 @end ignore
4476
4477 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4478 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4479 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4480 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4481 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4482 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4483 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4484 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4485 @ifset ELF
4486 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4487 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4488 @end ifset
4489
4490 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4491 @ifset ELF
4492 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4493 @end ifset
4494
4495 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4496 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4497 @ifset ELF
4498 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4499 @end ifset
4500
4501 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4502 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4503 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4504 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4505 @ifset COFF
4506 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4507 @end ifset
4508 @ifset COFF-ELF
4509 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4510 @end ifset
4511
4512 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4513 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4514 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4515 @ifset COFF-ELF
4516 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4517 @end ifset
4518 @ifclear no-space-dir
4519 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4520 @end ifclear
4521
4522 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4523 @ifclear no-space-dir
4524 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4525 @end ifclear
4526 @ifset have-stabs
4527 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4528 @end ifset
4529
4530 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4531 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4532 @ifset ELF
4533 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4534 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4535 @end ifset
4536
4537 @ifset COFF
4538 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4539 @end ifset
4540
4541 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4542 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4543 @ifset COFF-ELF
4544 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4545 @end ifset
4546
4547 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4548 @ifset COFF
4549 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4550 @end ifset
4551
4552 @ifset ELF
4553 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4554 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4555 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4556 @end ifset
4557
4558 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4559 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4560 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4561 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4562 @ifclear no-space-dir
4563 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4564 @end ifclear
4565 @ifset ELF
4566 * 2byte:: @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
4567 * 4byte:: @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
4568 * 8byte:: @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
4569 @end ifset
4570 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4571 @end menu
4572
4573 @node Abort
4574 @section @code{.abort}
4575
4576 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4577 @cindex stopping the assembly
4578 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4579 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4580 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4581 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4582 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4583
4584 @ifset COFF
4585 @node ABORT (COFF)
4586 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4587
4588 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4589 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4590 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4591
4592 @ifset BOUT
4593 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4594 but ignores it.
4595 @end ifset
4596 @end ifset
4597
4598 @node Align
4599 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4600
4601 @cindex padding the location counter
4602 @cindex @code{align} directive
4603 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4604 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4605 required, as described below.
4606
4607 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4608 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4609 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4610 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4611 with no-op instructions.
4612
4613 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4614 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4615 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4616 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4617 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4618 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4619 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4620
4621 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4622 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4623 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4624 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4625 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4626 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4627 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4628
4629 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4630 strongarm, it is the
4631 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4632 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4633 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4634 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4635
4636 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4637 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4638 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4639 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4640 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4641
4642 @node Altmacro
4643 @section @code{.altmacro}
4644 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4645
4646 @ftable @code
4647 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4648 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4649 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4650 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4651 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4652 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4653 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4654
4655 @item String delimiters
4656 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4657 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4658
4659 @table @code
4660 @item '@var{string}'
4661 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4662
4663 @item <@var{string}>
4664 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4665 @end table
4666
4667 @item single-character string escape
4668 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4669 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4670 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4671 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4672
4673 @item Expression results as strings
4674 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4675 and use the result as a string.
4676 @end ftable
4677
4678 @node Ascii
4679 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4680
4681 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4682 @cindex string literals
4683 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4684 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4685 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4686
4687 @node Asciz
4688 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4689
4690 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4691 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4692 @cindex null-terminated strings
4693 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4694 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4695
4696 @node Balign
4697 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4698
4699 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4700 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4701 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4702 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4703 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4704 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4705 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4706
4707 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4708 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4709 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4710 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4711 with no-op instructions.
4712
4713 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4714 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4715 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4716 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4717 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4718 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4719 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4720
4721 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4722 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4723 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4724 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4725 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4726 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4727 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4728 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4729 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4730 undefined.
4731
4732 @node Bundle directives
4733 @section Bundle directives
4734 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4735 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4736 @cindex bundle
4737 @cindex instruction bundle
4738 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4739 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4740 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4741 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4742 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4743 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4744 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4745
4746 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4747 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4748 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4749 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4750 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4751 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4752 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4753 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4754 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4755 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4756 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4757
4758 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4759 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4760 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4761 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4762 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4763 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4764 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4765 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4766 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4767
4768 @cindex bundle-locked
4769 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4770 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4771 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4772 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4773 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4774 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4775 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4776 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4777 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4778 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4779 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4780 bundle size.
4781
4782 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4783 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4784 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4785 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4786 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4787 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4788
4789 @node Byte
4790 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4791
4792 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4793 @cindex integers, one byte
4794 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4795 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4796
4797 @node CFI directives
4798 @section CFI directives
4799 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4800 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4801 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4802 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4803 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4804 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4805 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4806 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4807
4808 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4809 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4810
4811 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4812 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4813
4814 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4815 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4816 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4817 redefine it will result in an error.
4818
4819 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4820 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4821 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4822 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4823 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4824 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4825
4826 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4827 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4828
4829 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4830 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4831 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4832 unwind entry previously opened by
4833 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4834
4835 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4836 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4837 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4838 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4839 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4840 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4841 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4842 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4843 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4844 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4845 no personality routine.
4846
4847 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4848 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4849 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4850 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4851 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4852 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4853
4854 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4855 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4856 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4857 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4858 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4859 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4860 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4861 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4862
4863 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4864 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4865 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4866 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4867 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4868 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4869 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4870
4871 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4872 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4873 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4874 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4875 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4876 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4877
4878 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4879 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4880 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4881 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4882 by a section directive.
4883
4884 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4885 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4886 @code{.p2align} directive.
4887
4888 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4889 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4890 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4891
4892 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4893 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4894 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4895 remains the same.
4896
4897 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4898 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4899 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4900 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4901 CFA address.
4902
4903 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4904 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4905 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4906
4907 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4908 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4909 CFA.
4910
4911 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4912 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4913
4914 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4915 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4916 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4917 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4918 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4919 code it's annotating.
4920
4921 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4922 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4923
4924 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4925 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4926 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4927 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4928
4929 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4930 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4931
4932 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4933 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4934 i.e. no restoration needed.
4935
4936 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4937 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4938 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4939 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4940 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4941 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4942 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4943
4944 @smallexample
4945 je label
4946 popq %rbx
4947 .cfi_restore %rbx
4948 popq %r12
4949 .cfi_restore %r12
4950 popq %rbp
4951 .cfi_restore %rbp
4952 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4953 ret
4954 label:
4955 /* Do something else */
4956 @end smallexample
4957
4958 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4959 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4960 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4961 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4962 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4963 we can write:
4964
4965 @smallexample
4966 je label
4967 popq %rbx
4968 .cfi_remember_state
4969 .cfi_restore %rbx
4970 popq %r12
4971 .cfi_restore %r12
4972 popq %rbp
4973 .cfi_restore %rbp
4974 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4975 ret
4976 label:
4977 .cfi_restore_state
4978 /* Do something else */
4979 @end smallexample
4980
4981 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4982 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4983 @code{.cfi} directives.
4984
4985 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4986 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4987 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4988
4989 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4990 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4991
4992 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4993 SPARC register window has been saved.
4994
4995 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4996 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4997 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4998 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4999
5000 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
5001 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
5002 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
5003 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
5004
5005 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
5006 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
5007 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
5008 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
5009 or another register.
5010
5011 @node Comm
5012 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
5013
5014 @cindex @code{comm} directive
5015 @cindex symbol, common
5016 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
5017 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
5018 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
5019 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
5020 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
5021 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
5022 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
5023 using the largest size.
5024
5025 @ifset COFF-ELF
5026 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
5027 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
5028 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
5029 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
5030 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
5031 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
5032 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
5033 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
5034 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
5035 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
5036 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
5037 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
5038 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5039 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5040 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5041 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5042 @end ifset
5043
5044 @ifset HPPA
5045 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5046 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5047 @end ifset
5048
5049 @node Data
5050 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5051
5052 @cindex @code{data} directive
5053 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5054 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5055 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5056 to zero.
5057
5058 @ifset COFF
5059 @node Def
5060 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5061
5062 @cindex @code{def} directive
5063 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5064 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5065 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5066 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5067 @ifset BOUT
5068
5069 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
5070 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
5071 but ignored.
5072 @end ifset
5073 @end ifset
5074
5075 @ifset aout-bout
5076 @node Desc
5077 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5078
5079 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5080 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5081 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5082 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5083 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5084
5085 @ifset COFF
5086 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5087 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5088 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5089 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5090 @end ifset
5091 @end ifset
5092
5093 @ifset COFF
5094 @node Dim
5095 @section @code{.dim}
5096
5097 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5098 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5099 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5100 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5101 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5102 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5103 @ifset BOUT
5104
5105 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5106 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5107 ignores it.
5108 @end ifset
5109 @end ifset
5110
5111 @node Double
5112 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5113
5114 @cindex @code{double} directive
5115 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5116 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5117 assembles floating point numbers.
5118 @ifset GENERIC
5119 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5120 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5121 @end ifset
5122 @ifclear GENERIC
5123 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5124 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5125 in @sc{ieee} format.
5126 @end ifset
5127 @end ifclear
5128
5129 @node Eject
5130 @section @code{.eject}
5131
5132 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5133 @cindex new page, in listings
5134 @cindex page, in listings
5135 @cindex listing control: new page
5136 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5137
5138 @node Else
5139 @section @code{.else}
5140
5141 @cindex @code{else} directive
5142 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5143 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5144 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5145 was false.
5146
5147 @node Elseif
5148 @section @code{.elseif}
5149
5150 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5151 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5152 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5153 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5154
5155 @node End
5156 @section @code{.end}
5157
5158 @cindex @code{end} directive
5159 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5160 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5161
5162 @ifset COFF
5163 @node Endef
5164 @section @code{.endef}
5165
5166 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5167 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5168 @code{.def}.
5169 @ifset BOUT
5170
5171 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
5172 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
5173 directive but ignores it.
5174 @end ifset
5175 @end ifset
5176
5177 @node Endfunc
5178 @section @code{.endfunc}
5179 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5180 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5181
5182 @node Endif
5183 @section @code{.endif}
5184
5185 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5186 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5187 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5188 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5189
5190 @node Equ
5191 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5192
5193 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5194 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5195 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5196 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5197 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5198
5199 @ifset HPPA
5200 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5201 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5202 @end ifset
5203
5204 @ifset Z80
5205 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5206 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5207 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5208 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5209 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5210 @end ifset
5211
5212 @node Equiv
5213 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5214 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5215 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5216 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5217 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5218 undefined.
5219
5220 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5221 @smallexample
5222 .ifdef SYM
5223 .err
5224 .endif
5225 .equ SYM,VAL
5226 @end smallexample
5227 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5228
5229 @node Eqv
5230 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5231 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5232 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5233 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5234 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5235 value is taken.
5236
5237 @node Err
5238 @section @code{.err}
5239 @cindex @code{err} directive
5240 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5241 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5242 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5243
5244 @node Error
5245 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5246 @cindex error directive
5247
5248 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5249 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5250 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5251 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5252
5253 @smallexample
5254 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5255 @end smallexample
5256
5257 @node Exitm
5258 @section @code{.exitm}
5259 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5260
5261 @node Extern
5262 @section @code{.extern}
5263
5264 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5265 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5266 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5267 all undefined symbols as external.
5268
5269 @node Fail
5270 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5271
5272 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5273 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5274 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5275 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5276 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5277 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5278
5279 @node File
5280 @section @code{.file}
5281 @cindex @code{file} directive
5282
5283 @ifclear no-file-dir
5284 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5285 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5286 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5287
5288 @subheading Default Version
5289
5290 @cindex logical file name
5291 @cindex file name, logical
5292 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5293 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5294
5295 @smallexample
5296 .file @var{string}
5297 @end smallexample
5298
5299 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5300 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5301 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5302 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5303 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5304
5305 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5306 @end ifclear
5307
5308 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5309 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5310
5311 @smallexample
5312 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5313 @end smallexample
5314
5315 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5316 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5317 literal.
5318
5319 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5320 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5321 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5322 entries will have.
5323
5324 @node Fill
5325 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5326
5327 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5328 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5329 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5330 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5331 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5332 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5333 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5334 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5335 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5336 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5337 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5338 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5339 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5340 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5341
5342 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5343 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5344 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5345 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5346
5347 @node Float
5348 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5349
5350 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5351 @cindex @code{float} directive
5352 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5353 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5354 @ifset GENERIC
5355 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5356 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5357 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5358 @end ifset
5359 @ifclear GENERIC
5360 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5361 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5362 in @sc{ieee} format.
5363 @end ifset
5364 @end ifclear
5365
5366 @node Func
5367 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5368 @cindex @code{func} directive
5369 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5370 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5371 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5372 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5373 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5374 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5375 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5376 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5377
5378 @node Global
5379 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5380
5381 @cindex @code{global} directive
5382 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5383 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5384 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5385 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5386 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5387 from another file linked into the same program.
5388
5389 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5390 compatibility with other assemblers.
5391
5392 @ifset HPPA
5393 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5394 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5395 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5396 @end ifset
5397
5398 @ifset ELF
5399 @node Gnu_attribute
5400 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5401 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5402
5403 @node Hidden
5404 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5405
5406 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5407 @cindex visibility
5408 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5409 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5410 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5411
5412 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5413 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5414 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5415 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5416 @end ifset
5417
5418 @node hword
5419 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5420
5421 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5422 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5423 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5424 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5425 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5426 a 16 bit number for each.
5427
5428 @ifset GENERIC
5429 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5430 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5431 @end ifset
5432 @ifclear GENERIC
5433 @ifset W32
5434 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5435 @end ifset
5436 @ifset W16
5437 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5438 @end ifset
5439 @end ifclear
5440
5441 @node Ident
5442 @section @code{.ident}
5443
5444 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5445
5446 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5447 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5448 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5449 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5450 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5451 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5452 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5453
5454 @node If
5455 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5456
5457 @cindex conditional assembly
5458 @cindex @code{if} directive
5459 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5460 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5461 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5462 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5463 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5464 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5465 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5466 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5467
5468 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5469 @table @code
5470 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5471 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5472 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5473 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5474 is considered to be undefined.
5475
5476 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5477 @item .ifb @var{text}
5478 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5479
5480 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5481 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5482 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5483 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5484 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5485 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5486 string comparison is case sensitive.
5487
5488 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5489 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5490 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5491
5492 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5493 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5494 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5495
5496 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5497 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5498 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5499 equal to zero.
5500
5501 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5502 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5503 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5504
5505 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5506 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5507 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5508 to zero.
5509
5510 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5511 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5512 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5513
5514 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5515 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5516 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5517 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5518
5519 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5520 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5521 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5522 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5523
5524 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5525 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5526 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5527 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5528 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5529 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5530 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5531
5532 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5533 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5534 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5535 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5536
5537 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5538 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5539 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5540 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5541 @end table
5542
5543 @node Incbin
5544 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5545
5546 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5547 @cindex binary files, including
5548 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5549 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5550 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5551 around @var{file}.
5552
5553 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5554 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5555 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5556 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5557 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5558
5559 @node Include
5560 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5561
5562 @cindex @code{include} directive
5563 @cindex supporting files, including
5564 @cindex files, including
5565 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5566 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5567 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5568 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5569 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5570 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5571 around @var{file}.
5572
5573 @node Int
5574 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5575
5576 @cindex @code{int} directive
5577 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5578 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5579 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5580 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5581 of target the assembly is for.
5582
5583 @ifclear GENERIC
5584 @ifset H8
5585 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5586 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5587 32-bit integers.
5588 @end ifset
5589 @end ifclear
5590
5591 @ifset ELF
5592 @node Internal
5593 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5594
5595 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5596 @cindex visibility
5597 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5598 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5599 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5600
5601 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5602 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5603 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5604 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5605 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5606 @end ifset
5607
5608 @node Irp
5609 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5610
5611 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5612 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5613 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5614 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5615 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5616 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5617 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5618 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5619
5620 For example, assembling
5621
5622 @example
5623 .irp param,1,2,3
5624 move d\param,sp@@-
5625 .endr
5626 @end example
5627
5628 is equivalent to assembling
5629
5630 @example
5631 move d1,sp@@-
5632 move d2,sp@@-
5633 move d3,sp@@-
5634 @end example
5635
5636 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5637
5638 @node Irpc
5639 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5640
5641 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5642 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5643 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5644 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5645 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5646 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5647 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5648 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5649
5650 For example, assembling
5651
5652 @example
5653 .irpc param,123
5654 move d\param,sp@@-
5655 .endr
5656 @end example
5657
5658 is equivalent to assembling
5659
5660 @example
5661 move d1,sp@@-
5662 move d2,sp@@-
5663 move d3,sp@@-
5664 @end example
5665
5666 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5667 at @xref{Macro}.
5668
5669 @node Lcomm
5670 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5671
5672 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5673 @cindex local common symbols
5674 @cindex symbols, local common
5675 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5676 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5677 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5678 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5679 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5680 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5681
5682 @ifset GENERIC
5683 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5684 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5685 @end ifset
5686
5687 @ifset HPPA
5688 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5689 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5690 @end ifset
5691
5692 @node Lflags
5693 @section @code{.lflags}
5694
5695 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5696 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5697 assemblers, but ignores it.
5698
5699 @ifclear no-line-dir
5700 @node Line
5701 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5702
5703 @cindex @code{line} directive
5704 @cindex logical line number
5705 @ifset aout-bout
5706 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5707 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5708 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5709 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5710 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5711 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5712 @end ifset
5713
5714 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5715 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5716 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5717 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5718 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5719
5720 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5721 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5722 debugging.
5723 @end ifclear
5724
5725 @node Linkonce
5726 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5727 @cindex COMDAT
5728 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5729 @cindex common sections
5730 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5731 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5732 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5733 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5734 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5735 unique.
5736
5737 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5738 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5739 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5740
5741 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5742 following strings. For example:
5743 @smallexample
5744 .linkonce same_size
5745 @end smallexample
5746 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5747
5748 @table @code
5749 @item discard
5750 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5751
5752 @item one_only
5753 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5754
5755 @item same_size
5756 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5757
5758 @item same_contents
5759 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5760 @end table
5761
5762 @node List
5763 @section @code{.list}
5764
5765 @cindex @code{list} directive
5766 @cindex listing control, turning on
5767 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5768 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5769 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5770 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5771 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5772
5773 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5774 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5775 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5776
5777 @node Ln
5778 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5779
5780 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5781 @ifclear no-line-dir
5782 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5783 @end ifclear
5784 @ifset no-line-dir
5785 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5786 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5787 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5788 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5789 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5790 @ifset BOUT
5791
5792 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5793 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5794 output format.
5795 @end ifset
5796 @end ifset
5797
5798 @node Loc
5799 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5800 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5801 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5802 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5803 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5804 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5805 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5806 the row is added.
5807
5808 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5809
5810 @table @code
5811 @item basic_block
5812 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5813 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5814
5815 @item prologue_end
5816 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5817 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5818
5819 @item epilogue_begin
5820 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5821 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5822
5823 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5824 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5825 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5826 either 0 or 1.
5827
5828 @item isa @var{value}
5829 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5830 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5831
5832 @item discriminator @var{value}
5833 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5834 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5835
5836 @item view @var{value}
5837 This option causes a row to be added to @code{.debug_line} in reference to the
5838 current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
5839 instruction), and to associate @var{value} with the @code{view} register in the
5840 @code{.debug_line} state machine. If @var{value} is a label, both the
5841 @code{view} register and the label are set to the number of prior @code{.loc}
5842 directives at the same program location. If @var{value} is the literal
5843 @code{0}, the @code{view} register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
5844 that there aren't any prior @code{.loc} directives at the same program
5845 location. If @var{value} is the literal @code{-0}, the assembler arrange for
5846 the @code{view} register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
5847 @code{.loc} directives at the same program location.
5848
5849 @end table
5850
5851 @node Loc_mark_labels
5852 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5853 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5854 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5855 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5856 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5857 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5858 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5859 this function respectively.
5860
5861 @ifset ELF
5862 @node Local
5863 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5864
5865 @cindex @code{local} directive
5866 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5867 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5868 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5869 they will be created.
5870
5871 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5872 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5873 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5874 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5875 @end ifset
5876
5877 @node Long
5878 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5879
5880 @cindex @code{long} directive
5881 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5882
5883 @ignore
5884 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5885 @c what it really ought to do
5886 @node Lsym
5887 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5888
5889 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5890 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5891 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5892 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5893 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5894 the same as the expression value:
5895 @smallexample
5896 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5897 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5898 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5899 @end smallexample
5900 @noindent
5901 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5902 @end ignore
5903
5904 @node Macro
5905 @section @code{.macro}
5906
5907 @cindex macros
5908 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5909 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5910 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5911
5912 @example
5913 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5914 .long \from
5915 .if \to-\from
5916 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5917 .endif
5918 .endm
5919 @end example
5920
5921 @noindent
5922 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5923
5924 @example
5925 .long 0
5926 .long 1
5927 .long 2
5928 .long 3
5929 .long 4
5930 .long 5
5931 @end example
5932
5933 @ftable @code
5934 @item .macro @var{macname}
5935 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5936 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5937 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5938 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5939 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5940 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5941 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5942 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5943 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5944 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5945 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5946 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5947
5948 @table @code
5949 @item .macro comm
5950 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5951 arguments.
5952
5953 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5954 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5955 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5956 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5957 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5958
5959 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5960 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5961 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5962 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5963 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5964 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5965 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5966 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5967
5968 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5969 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5970 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5971 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5972 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5973
5974 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5975 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5976 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5977
5978 @end table
5979
5980 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5981 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5982 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5983 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5984 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5985 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5986 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5987 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5988 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5989 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5990 this macro definition:
5991
5992 @example
5993 .macro label l
5994 \l:
5995 .endm
5996 @end example
5997
5998 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5999 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
6000 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
6001 identifier.
6002
6003 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
6004 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
6005 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
6006 length specifier like this:
6007
6008 @example
6009 .macro opcode base length
6010 \base.\length
6011 .endm
6012 @end example
6013
6014 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
6015 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
6016 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
6017
6018 There are several possible ways around this problem:
6019
6020 @table @code
6021 @item Insert white space
6022 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
6023 solution. eg:
6024
6025 @example
6026 .macro label l
6027 \l :
6028 .endm
6029 @end example
6030
6031 @item Use @samp{\()}
6032 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
6033 the following text. eg:
6034
6035 @example
6036 .macro opcode base length
6037 \base\().\length
6038 .endm
6039 @end example
6040
6041 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
6042 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
6043 used as a separator. eg:
6044
6045 @example
6046 .altmacro
6047 .macro label l
6048 l&:
6049 .endm
6050 @end example
6051 @end table
6052
6053 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6054 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6055 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6056
6057 @item .endm
6058 @cindex @code{endm} directive
6059 Mark the end of a macro definition.
6060
6061 @item .exitm
6062 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
6063 Exit early from the current macro definition.
6064
6065 @cindex number of macros executed
6066 @cindex macros, count executed
6067 @item \@@
6068 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6069 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6070 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6071
6072 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6073 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6074 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6075 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6076 @end ftable
6077
6078 @node MRI
6079 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6080
6081 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6082 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6083 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6084 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6085 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6086 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6087
6088 @node Noaltmacro
6089 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6090 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6091
6092 @node Nolist
6093 @section @code{.nolist}
6094
6095 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6096 @cindex listing control, turning off
6097 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6098 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6099 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6100 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6101 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6102
6103 @node Octa
6104 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6105
6106 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
6107 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6108 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6109 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6110 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6111 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6112
6113 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6114 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6115
6116 @node Offset
6117 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6118
6119 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6120 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6121 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6122 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6123 directive.
6124
6125 @node Org
6126 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6127
6128 @cindex @code{org} directive
6129 @cindex location counter, advancing
6130 @cindex advancing location counter
6131 @cindex current address, advancing
6132 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6133 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6134 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6135 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6136 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6137 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6138 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6139 is the same as the current subsection.
6140
6141 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6142 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6143 backwards.
6144
6145 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6146 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6147 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6148 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6149 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6150 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6151
6152 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6153 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6154 people's assemblers.
6155
6156 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6157 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6158 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6159 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6160
6161 @node P2align
6162 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6163
6164 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6165 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6166 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6167 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6168 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6169 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6170 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6171 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6172
6173 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6174 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6175 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
6176 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6177 with no-op instructions.
6178
6179 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6180 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6181 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6182 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6183 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6184 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6185 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6186
6187 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6188 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6189 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6190 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6191 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6192 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6193 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6194 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6195 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6196 undefined.
6197
6198 @ifset ELF
6199 @node PopSection
6200 @section @code{.popsection}
6201
6202 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6203 @cindex Section Stack
6204 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6205 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6206 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6207 (@pxref{Previous}).
6208
6209 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6210 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6211 stack.
6212 @end ifset
6213
6214 @ifset ELF
6215 @node Previous
6216 @section @code{.previous}
6217
6218 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6219 @cindex Section Stack
6220 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6221 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6222 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6223 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6224
6225 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6226 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6227 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6228 subsections). For example:
6229
6230 @smallexample
6231 .section A
6232 .subsection 1
6233 .word 0x1234
6234 .subsection 2
6235 .word 0x5678
6236 .previous
6237 .word 0x9abc
6238 @end smallexample
6239
6240 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6241 section A. Whilst:
6242
6243 @smallexample
6244 .section A
6245 .subsection 1
6246 # Now in section A subsection 1
6247 .word 0x1234
6248 .section B
6249 .subsection 0
6250 # Now in section B subsection 0
6251 .word 0x5678
6252 .subsection 1
6253 # Now in section B subsection 1
6254 .word 0x9abc
6255 .previous
6256 # Now in section B subsection 0
6257 .word 0xdef0
6258 @end smallexample
6259
6260 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6261 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6262
6263 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6264 the top section on the section stack.
6265 @end ifset
6266
6267 @node Print
6268 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6269
6270 @cindex @code{print} directive
6271 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6272 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6273
6274 @ifset ELF
6275 @node Protected
6276 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6277
6278 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6279 @cindex visibility
6280 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6281 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6282
6283 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6284 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6285 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6286 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6287 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6288 this.
6289 @end ifset
6290
6291 @node Psize
6292 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6293
6294 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6295 @cindex listing control: paper size
6296 @cindex paper size, for listings
6297 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6298 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6299
6300 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6301 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6302 default width is 200 columns.
6303
6304 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6305 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6306 @code{.eject}).
6307
6308 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6309 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6310
6311 @node Purgem
6312 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6313
6314 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6315 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6316 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6317
6318 @ifset ELF
6319 @node PushSection
6320 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6321
6322 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6323 @cindex Section Stack
6324 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6325 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6326 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6327 (@pxref{Previous}).
6328
6329 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6330 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6331 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6332 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6333 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6334 @end ifset
6335
6336 @node Quad
6337 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6338
6339 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6340 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6341 each bignum, it emits
6342 @ifclear bignum-16
6343 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6344 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6345 @cindex eight-byte integer
6346 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6347
6348 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6349 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6350 @end ifclear
6351 @ifset bignum-16
6352 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6353 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6354 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6355 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6356 @end ifset
6357
6358 @node Reloc
6359 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6360
6361 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6362 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6363 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6364 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6365 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6366 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6367 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6368 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6369 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6370 section.
6371
6372 @node Rept
6373 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6374
6375 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6376 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6377 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6378
6379 For example, assembling
6380
6381 @example
6382 .rept 3
6383 .long 0
6384 .endr
6385 @end example
6386
6387 is equivalent to assembling
6388
6389 @example
6390 .long 0
6391 .long 0
6392 .long 0
6393 @end example
6394
6395 @node Sbttl
6396 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6397
6398 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6399 @cindex subtitles for listings
6400 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6401 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6402 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6403
6404 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6405 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6406
6407 @ifset COFF
6408 @node Scl
6409 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6410
6411 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6412 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6413 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6414 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6415 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6416 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6417 symbolic debugging information.
6418 @ifset BOUT
6419
6420 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6421 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6422 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6423 @end ifset
6424 @end ifset
6425
6426 @ifset COFF-ELF
6427 @node Section
6428 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6429
6430 @cindex named section
6431 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6432 named @var{name}.
6433
6434 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6435 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6436 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6437
6438 @ifset COFF
6439 @ifset ELF
6440 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6441 @subheading COFF Version
6442 @end ifset
6443
6444 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6445 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6446 ways:
6447
6448 @smallexample
6449 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6450 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6451 @end smallexample
6452
6453 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6454 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6455
6456 @table @code
6457 @item b
6458 bss section (uninitialized data)
6459 @item n
6460 section is not loaded
6461 @item w
6462 writable section
6463 @item d
6464 data section
6465 @item e
6466 exclude section from linking
6467 @item r
6468 read-only section
6469 @item x
6470 executable section
6471 @item s
6472 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6473 @item a
6474 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6475 @item y
6476 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6477 @item 0-9
6478 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6479 @end table
6480
6481 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6482 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6483 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6484 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6485 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6486
6487 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6488 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6489 @end ifset
6490
6491 @ifset ELF
6492 @ifset COFF
6493 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6494 @subheading ELF Version
6495 @end ifset
6496
6497 @cindex Section Stack
6498 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6499 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6500 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6501 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6502
6503 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6504 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6505
6506 @smallexample
6507 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6508 @end smallexample
6509
6510 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6511 @kindex --sectname-subst
6512 @cindex section name substitution
6513 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6514 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6515 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6516
6517 @smallexample
6518 .macro exception_code
6519 .section %S.exception
6520 [exception code here]
6521 .previous
6522 .endm
6523
6524 .text
6525 [code]
6526 exception_code
6527 [...]
6528
6529 .section .init
6530 [init code]
6531 exception_code
6532 [...]
6533 @end smallexample
6534
6535 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6536 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6537 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6538 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6539 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6540 macros just for that purpose.
6541
6542 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6543 combination of the following characters:
6544
6545 @table @code
6546 @item a
6547 section is allocatable
6548 @item d
6549 section is a GNU_MBIND section
6550 @item e
6551 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6552 @item w
6553 section is writable
6554 @item x
6555 section is executable
6556 @item M
6557 section is mergeable
6558 @item S
6559 section contains zero terminated strings
6560 @item G
6561 section is a member of a section group
6562 @item T
6563 section is used for thread-local-storage
6564 @item ?
6565 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6566 @item @code{<number>}
6567 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6568 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6569 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6570 resulting value.
6571 @item @code{<target specific>}
6572 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6573 @end table
6574
6575 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6576 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6577 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6578 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6579 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6580 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6581
6582 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6583
6584 @table @code
6585 @item @@progbits
6586 section contains data
6587 @item @@nobits
6588 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6589 @item @@note
6590 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6591 @item @@init_array
6592 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6593 @item @@fini_array
6594 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6595 @item @@preinit_array
6596 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6597 @item @@@code{<number>}
6598 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6599 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6600 some targets extend this list with their own types
6601 @end table
6602
6603 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6604 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6605
6606 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6607 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6608 @code{%} character.
6609
6610 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6611 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6612 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6613
6614 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6615 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6616
6617 @smallexample
6618 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6619 @end smallexample
6620
6621 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6622 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6623 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6624 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6625 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6626 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6627 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6628 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6629 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6630
6631 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6632 be present along with an additional field like this:
6633
6634 @smallexample
6635 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6636 @end smallexample
6637
6638 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6639 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6640
6641 @table @code
6642 @item comdat
6643 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6644 @item .gnu.linkonce
6645 an alias for comdat
6646 @end table
6647
6648 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6649 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6650
6651 @smallexample
6652 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6653 @end smallexample
6654
6655 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6656 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6657 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6658 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6659 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6660 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6661
6662 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6663 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6664 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6665 executable. The section will contain data.
6666
6667 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6668 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6669
6670 @smallexample
6671 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6672 @end smallexample
6673
6674 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6675 separated flags:
6676
6677 @table @code
6678 @item #alloc
6679 section is allocatable
6680 @item #write
6681 section is writable
6682 @item #execinstr
6683 section is executable
6684 @item #exclude
6685 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6686 @item #tls
6687 section is used for thread local storage
6688 @end table
6689
6690 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6691 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6692 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6693 work.
6694 @end ifset
6695 @end ifset
6696
6697 @node Set
6698 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6699
6700 @cindex @code{set} directive
6701 @cindex symbol value, setting
6702 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6703 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6704 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6705 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6706
6707 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6708 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6709 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6710 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6711 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6712 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6713 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6714 different symbols.
6715
6716 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6717 file is the last value stored into it.
6718
6719 @ifset Z80
6720 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6721 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6722 @end ifset
6723
6724 @node Short
6725 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6726
6727 @cindex @code{short} directive
6728 @ifset GENERIC
6729 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6730 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6731
6732 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6733 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6734 @end ifset
6735 @ifclear GENERIC
6736 @ifset W16
6737 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6738 @end ifset
6739 @ifset W32
6740 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6741 a 16 bit number for each.
6742 @end ifset
6743 @end ifclear
6744
6745 @node Single
6746 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6747
6748 @cindex @code{single} directive
6749 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6750 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6751 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6752 @ifset GENERIC
6753 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6754 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6755 @end ifset
6756 @ifclear GENERIC
6757 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6758 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6759 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6760 @end ifset
6761 @end ifclear
6762
6763 @ifset COFF-ELF
6764 @node Size
6765 @section @code{.size}
6766
6767 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6768
6769 @ifset COFF
6770 @ifset ELF
6771 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6772 @subheading COFF Version
6773 @end ifset
6774
6775 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6776 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6777 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6778
6779 @smallexample
6780 .size @var{expression}
6781 @end smallexample
6782
6783 @ifset BOUT
6784 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6785 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6786 ignores it.
6787 @end ifset
6788 @end ifset
6789
6790 @ifset ELF
6791 @ifset COFF
6792 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6793 @subheading ELF Version
6794 @end ifset
6795
6796 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6797 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6798
6799 @smallexample
6800 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6801 @end smallexample
6802
6803 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6804 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6805 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6806 symbols.
6807 @end ifset
6808 @end ifset
6809
6810 @ifclear no-space-dir
6811 @node Skip
6812 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6813
6814 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6815 @cindex filling memory
6816 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6817 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6818 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6819 @samp{.space}.
6820 @end ifclear
6821
6822 @node Sleb128
6823 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6824
6825 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6826 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6827 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6828 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6829
6830 @ifclear no-space-dir
6831 @node Space
6832 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6833
6834 @cindex @code{space} directive
6835 @cindex filling memory
6836 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6837 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6838 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6839 as @samp{.skip}.
6840
6841 @ifset HPPA
6842 @quotation
6843 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6844 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6845 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6846 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6847 for a summary.
6848 @end quotation
6849 @end ifset
6850 @end ifclear
6851
6852 @ifset have-stabs
6853 @node Stab
6854 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6855
6856 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6857 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6858 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6859 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6860 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6861 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6862 Up to five fields are required:
6863
6864 @table @var
6865 @item string
6866 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6867 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6868 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6869 using this field.
6870
6871 @item type
6872 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6873 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6874 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6875
6876 @item other
6877 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6878 low 8 bits of this expression.
6879
6880 @item desc
6881 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6882 bits of this expression.
6883
6884 @item value
6885 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6886 @end table
6887
6888 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6889 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6890 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6891 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6892
6893 @table @code
6894 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6895 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6896
6897 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6898 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6899 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6900 strings.
6901
6902 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6903 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6904 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6905 assembled.
6906
6907 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6908 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6909 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6910
6911 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6912 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6913 All five fields are specified.
6914 @end table
6915 @end ifset
6916 @c end have-stabs
6917
6918 @node String
6919 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6920 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6921
6922 @cindex string, copying to object file
6923 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6924 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6925 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6926 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6927 @cindex @code{string} directive
6928 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6929 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6930 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6931 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6932
6933 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6934 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6935 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6936 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6937
6938 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6939 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6940 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6941 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6942
6943 Example:
6944 @smallexample
6945 .string32 "BYE"
6946 expands to:
6947 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6948 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6949 @end smallexample
6950
6951
6952 @node Struct
6953 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6954
6955 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6956 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6957 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6958 @smallexample
6959 .struct 0
6960 field1:
6961 .struct field1 + 4
6962 field2:
6963 .struct field2 + 4
6964 field3:
6965 @end smallexample
6966 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6967 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6968 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6969 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6970 before further assembly.
6971
6972 @ifset ELF
6973 @node SubSection
6974 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6975
6976 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6977 @cindex Section Stack
6978 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6979 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6980 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6981 (@pxref{Previous}).
6982
6983 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6984 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6985 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6986 @end ifset
6987
6988 @ifset ELF
6989 @node Symver
6990 @section @code{.symver}
6991 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6992 @cindex symbol versioning
6993 @cindex versions of symbols
6994 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6995 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6996 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6997 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6998 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6999 shared library.
7000
7001 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
7002 @smallexample
7003 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
7004 @end smallexample
7005 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
7006 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
7007 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
7008 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
7009 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
7010 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
7011 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
7012 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
7013 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
7014 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
7015 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
7016 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
7017 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
7018 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
7019
7020 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
7021 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
7022 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
7023 symbol table.
7024
7025 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7026 @smallexample
7027 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
7028 @end smallexample
7029 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
7030 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
7031 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
7032 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
7033
7034 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7035 @smallexample
7036 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
7037 @end smallexample
7038 When @var{name} is not defined within the
7039 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
7040 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
7041 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
7042 @end ifset
7043
7044 @ifset COFF
7045 @node Tag
7046 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
7047
7048 @cindex COFF structure debugging
7049 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
7050 @cindex @code{tag} directive
7051 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
7052 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
7053 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
7054 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7055 @ifset BOUT
7056
7057 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
7058 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
7059 ignores it.
7060 @end ifset
7061 @end ifset
7062
7063 @node Text
7064 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7065
7066 @cindex @code{text} directive
7067 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7068 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7069 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7070 is used.
7071
7072 @node Title
7073 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7074
7075 @cindex @code{title} directive
7076 @cindex listing control: title line
7077 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7078 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7079
7080 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7081 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7082
7083 @ifset COFF-ELF
7084 @node Type
7085 @section @code{.type}
7086
7087 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7088
7089 @ifset COFF
7090 @ifset ELF
7091 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7092 @subheading COFF Version
7093 @end ifset
7094
7095 @cindex COFF symbol type
7096 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7097 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7098 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7099 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7100
7101 @smallexample
7102 .type @var{int}
7103 @end smallexample
7104
7105 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7106 entry.
7107
7108 @ifset BOUT
7109 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
7110 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
7111 directive but ignores it.
7112 @end ifset
7113 @end ifset
7114
7115 @ifset ELF
7116 @ifset COFF
7117 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7118 @subheading ELF Version
7119 @end ifset
7120
7121 @cindex ELF symbol type
7122 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7123 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7124 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7125
7126 @smallexample
7127 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7128 @end smallexample
7129
7130 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7131 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7132 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7133 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7134
7135 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7136 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7137 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7138 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7139 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7140 assemblers.
7141
7142 The syntaxes supported are:
7143
7144 @smallexample
7145 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7146 .type <name>,#<type>
7147 .type <name>,@@<type>
7148 .type <name>,%<type>
7149 .type <name>,"<type>"
7150 @end smallexample
7151
7152 The types supported are:
7153
7154 @table @gcctabopt
7155 @item STT_FUNC
7156 @itemx function
7157 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7158
7159 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7160 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7161 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7162 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7163
7164 @item STT_OBJECT
7165 @itemx object
7166 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7167
7168 @item STT_TLS
7169 @itemx tls_object
7170 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7171
7172 @item STT_COMMON
7173 @itemx common
7174 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7175
7176 @item STT_NOTYPE
7177 @itemx notype
7178 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7179
7180 @item gnu_unique_object
7181 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7182 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7183 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7184 systems).
7185
7186 @end table
7187
7188 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7189
7190 @end ifset
7191 @end ifset
7192
7193 @node Uleb128
7194 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7195
7196 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7197 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7198 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7199 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7200
7201 @ifset COFF
7202 @node Val
7203 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7204
7205 @cindex @code{val} directive
7206 @cindex COFF value attribute
7207 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7208 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7209 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7210 entry.
7211 @ifset BOUT
7212
7213 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
7214 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
7215 @end ifset
7216 @end ifset
7217
7218 @ifset ELF
7219 @node Version
7220 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7221
7222 @cindex @code{version} directive
7223 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7224 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7225 @end ifset
7226
7227 @ifset ELF
7228 @node VTableEntry
7229 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7230
7231 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7232 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7233 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7234
7235 @node VTableInherit
7236 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7237
7238 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7239 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7240 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7241 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7242 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7243 @end ifset
7244
7245 @node Warning
7246 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7247 @cindex warning directive
7248 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7249 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7250
7251 @node Weak
7252 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7253
7254 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7255 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7256 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7257
7258 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7259 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7260 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7261
7262 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7263 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7264 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7265
7266 @node Weakref
7267 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7268
7269 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7270 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7271 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7272 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7273 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7274 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7275
7276 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7277 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7278 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7279 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7280 had the references to the alias removed.
7281
7282 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7283 within the assembler.
7284
7285 @node Word
7286 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7287
7288 @cindex @code{word} directive
7289 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7290 separated by commas.
7291 @ifclear GENERIC
7292 @ifset W32
7293 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7294 @end ifset
7295 @ifset W16
7296 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7297 @end ifset
7298 @end ifclear
7299 @ifset GENERIC
7300
7301 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7302 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7303 @end ifset
7304
7305 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7306 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7307 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7308 @cindex difference tables altered
7309 @cindex altered difference tables
7310 @quotation
7311 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7312 @end quotation
7313
7314 @ifset GENERIC
7315 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7316 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7317 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7318 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7319
7320 @end ifset
7321 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7322 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7323 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7324 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7325 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7326 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7327 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7328 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7329 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7330 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7331 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7332 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7333 @code{sym2}.
7334
7335 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7336 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7337 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7338 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7339 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7340 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7341 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7342
7343 @ifset INTERNALS
7344 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7345 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7346 assembly language programmers.
7347 @end ifset
7348 @end ifset
7349 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7350
7351 @ifclear no-space-dir
7352 @node Zero
7353 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7354
7355 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7356 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7357 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7358 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7359 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7360 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7361 @end ifclear
7362
7363 @ifset ELF
7364 @node 2byte
7365 @section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7366 @cindex @code{2byte} directive
7367 @cindex two-byte integer
7368 @cindex integer, 2-byte
7369
7370 This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there
7371 are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression
7372 is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
7373 section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit
7374 in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
7375 bytes of the expression's value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated
7376 at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
7377 value at link time.
7378
7379 This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
7380 values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
7381 different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
7382
7383 This directive is only available for ELF targets,
7384
7385 @node 4byte
7386 @section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7387 @cindex @code{4byte} directive
7388 @cindex four-byte integer
7389 @cindex integer, 4-byte
7390
7391 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
7392 long values into the output.
7393
7394 @node 8byte
7395 @section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7396 @cindex @code{8byte} directive
7397 @cindex eight-byte integer
7398 @cindex integer, 8-byte
7399
7400 Like the @option{.8byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
7401 byte long bignum values into the output.
7402
7403 @end ifset
7404
7405 @node Deprecated
7406 @section Deprecated Directives
7407
7408 @cindex deprecated directives
7409 @cindex obsolescent directives
7410 One day these directives won't work.
7411 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7412 @table @t
7413 @item .abort
7414 @item .line
7415 @end table
7416
7417 @ifset ELF
7418 @node Object Attributes
7419 @chapter Object Attributes
7420 @cindex object attributes
7421
7422 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7423 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7424 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7425 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7426 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7427 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7428 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7429 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7430 newer generation at run-time.
7431
7432 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7433 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7434 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7435 correctly.
7436
7437 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7438 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7439 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7440 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7441 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7442 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7443
7444 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7445 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7446
7447 @menu
7448 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7449 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7450 @end menu
7451
7452 @node GNU Object Attributes
7453 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7454
7455 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7456 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7457
7458 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7459 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7460 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7461 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7462 architecture-dependent ones.
7463
7464 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7465
7466 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7467
7468 @table @r
7469 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7470 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7471 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7472 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7473 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7474 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7475 @end table
7476
7477 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7478
7479 @table @r
7480 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7481 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7482
7483 @itemize @bullet
7484 @item
7485 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7486 @item
7487 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7488 double-precision FPU.
7489 @item
7490 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7491 @item
7492 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7493 @item
7494 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7495 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7496 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7497 @item
7498 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7499 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7500 general-purpose registers.
7501 @item
7502 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7503 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7504 @item
7505 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7506 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7507 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7508 @end itemize
7509 @end table
7510
7511 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7512
7513 @table @r
7514 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7515 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7516
7517 @itemize @bullet
7518 @item
7519 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7520 @item
7521 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7522 @item
7523 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7524 @item
7525 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7526 @end itemize
7527
7528 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7529 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7530
7531 @itemize @bullet
7532 @item
7533 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7534 @item
7535 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7536 @item
7537 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7538 @item
7539 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7540 @end itemize
7541 @end table
7542
7543 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7544
7545 @table @r
7546 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7547 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7548
7549 @itemize @bullet
7550 @item
7551 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7552 @item
7553 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7554 @item
7555 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7556 @end itemize
7557 @end table
7558
7559 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7560 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7561
7562 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7563 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7564 mailing list.
7565
7566 @itemize @bullet
7567 @item
7568 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7569 @item
7570 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7571 @item
7572 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7573 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7574 @item
7575 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7576 @item
7577 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7578 @item
7579 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7580 @end itemize
7581
7582 @end ifset
7583
7584 @ifset GENERIC
7585 @node Machine Dependencies
7586 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7587
7588 @cindex machine dependencies
7589 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7590 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7591 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7592 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7593 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7594 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7595 optimization.
7596
7597 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7598 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7599 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7600
7601 @menu
7602 @ifset AARCH64
7603 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7604 @end ifset
7605 @ifset ALPHA
7606 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7607 @end ifset
7608 @ifset ARC
7609 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7610 @end ifset
7611 @ifset ARM
7612 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7613 @end ifset
7614 @ifset AVR
7615 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7616 @end ifset
7617 @ifset Blackfin
7618 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7619 @end ifset
7620 @ifset CR16
7621 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7622 @end ifset
7623 @ifset CRIS
7624 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7625 @end ifset
7626 @ifset D10V
7627 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7628 @end ifset
7629 @ifset D30V
7630 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7631 @end ifset
7632 @ifset EPIPHANY
7633 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7634 @end ifset
7635 @ifset H8/300
7636 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7637 @end ifset
7638 @ifset HPPA
7639 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7640 @end ifset
7641 @ifset I370
7642 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7643 @end ifset
7644 @ifset I80386
7645 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7646 @end ifset
7647 @ifset I860
7648 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7649 @end ifset
7650 @ifset I960
7651 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7652 @end ifset
7653 @ifset IA64
7654 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7655 @end ifset
7656 @ifset IP2K
7657 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7658 @end ifset
7659 @ifset LM32
7660 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7661 @end ifset
7662 @ifset M32C
7663 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7664 @end ifset
7665 @ifset M32R
7666 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7667 @end ifset
7668 @ifset M680X0
7669 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7670 @end ifset
7671 @ifset M68HC11
7672 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7673 @end ifset
7674 @ifset METAG
7675 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7676 @end ifset
7677 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7678 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7679 @end ifset
7680 @ifset MIPS
7681 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7682 @end ifset
7683 @ifset MMIX
7684 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7685 @end ifset
7686 @ifset MSP430
7687 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7688 @end ifset
7689 @ifset NDS32
7690 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7691 @end ifset
7692 @ifset NIOSII
7693 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7694 @end ifset
7695 @ifset NS32K
7696 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7697 @end ifset
7698 @ifset PDP11
7699 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7700 @end ifset
7701 @ifset PJ
7702 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7703 @end ifset
7704 @ifset PPC
7705 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7706 @end ifset
7707 @ifset PRU
7708 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7709 @end ifset
7710 @ifset RL78
7711 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7712 @end ifset
7713 @ifset RISCV
7714 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7715 @end ifset
7716 @ifset RX
7717 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7718 @end ifset
7719 @ifset S390
7720 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7721 @end ifset
7722 @ifset SCORE
7723 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7724 @end ifset
7725 @ifset SH
7726 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7727 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7728 @end ifset
7729 @ifset SPARC
7730 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7731 @end ifset
7732 @ifset TIC54X
7733 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7734 @end ifset
7735 @ifset TIC6X
7736 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7737 @end ifset
7738 @ifset TILEGX
7739 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7740 @end ifset
7741 @ifset TILEPRO
7742 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7743 @end ifset
7744 @ifset V850
7745 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7746 @end ifset
7747 @ifset VAX
7748 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7749 @end ifset
7750 @ifset VISIUM
7751 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7752 @end ifset
7753 @ifset WASM32
7754 * WebAssembly-Dependent:: WebAssembly Dependent Features
7755 @end ifset
7756 @ifset XGATE
7757 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Dependent Features
7758 @end ifset
7759 @ifset XSTORMY16
7760 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7761 @end ifset
7762 @ifset XTENSA
7763 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7764 @end ifset
7765 @ifset Z80
7766 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7767 @end ifset
7768 @ifset Z8000
7769 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7770 @end ifset
7771 @end menu
7772
7773 @lowersections
7774 @end ifset
7775
7776 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7777 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7778 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7779 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7780 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7781 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7782 @c in both conditional blocks.
7783
7784 @ifset AARCH64
7785 @include c-aarch64.texi
7786 @end ifset
7787
7788 @ifset ALPHA
7789 @include c-alpha.texi
7790 @end ifset
7791
7792 @ifset ARC
7793 @include c-arc.texi
7794 @end ifset
7795
7796 @ifset ARM
7797 @include c-arm.texi
7798 @end ifset
7799
7800 @ifset AVR
7801 @include c-avr.texi
7802 @end ifset
7803
7804 @ifset Blackfin
7805 @include c-bfin.texi
7806 @end ifset
7807
7808 @ifset CR16
7809 @include c-cr16.texi
7810 @end ifset
7811
7812 @ifset CRIS
7813 @include c-cris.texi
7814 @end ifset
7815
7816 @ifset Renesas-all
7817 @ifclear GENERIC
7818 @node Machine Dependencies
7819 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7820
7821 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7822 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7823 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7824 family.
7825
7826 @menu
7827 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7828 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7829 @end menu
7830 @lowersections
7831 @end ifclear
7832 @end ifset
7833
7834 @ifset D10V
7835 @include c-d10v.texi
7836 @end ifset
7837
7838 @ifset D30V
7839 @include c-d30v.texi
7840 @end ifset
7841
7842 @ifset EPIPHANY
7843 @include c-epiphany.texi
7844 @end ifset
7845
7846 @ifset H8/300
7847 @include c-h8300.texi
7848 @end ifset
7849
7850 @ifset HPPA
7851 @include c-hppa.texi
7852 @end ifset
7853
7854 @ifset I370
7855 @include c-i370.texi
7856 @end ifset
7857
7858 @ifset I80386
7859 @include c-i386.texi
7860 @end ifset
7861
7862 @ifset I860
7863 @include c-i860.texi
7864 @end ifset
7865
7866 @ifset I960
7867 @include c-i960.texi
7868 @end ifset
7869
7870 @ifset IA64
7871 @include c-ia64.texi
7872 @end ifset
7873
7874 @ifset IP2K
7875 @include c-ip2k.texi
7876 @end ifset
7877
7878 @ifset LM32
7879 @include c-lm32.texi
7880 @end ifset
7881
7882 @ifset M32C
7883 @include c-m32c.texi
7884 @end ifset
7885
7886 @ifset M32R
7887 @include c-m32r.texi
7888 @end ifset
7889
7890 @ifset M680X0
7891 @include c-m68k.texi
7892 @end ifset
7893
7894 @ifset M68HC11
7895 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7896 @end ifset
7897
7898 @ifset METAG
7899 @include c-metag.texi
7900 @end ifset
7901
7902 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7903 @include c-microblaze.texi
7904 @end ifset
7905
7906 @ifset MIPS
7907 @include c-mips.texi
7908 @end ifset
7909
7910 @ifset MMIX
7911 @include c-mmix.texi
7912 @end ifset
7913
7914 @ifset MSP430
7915 @include c-msp430.texi
7916 @end ifset
7917
7918 @ifset NDS32
7919 @include c-nds32.texi
7920 @end ifset
7921
7922 @ifset NIOSII
7923 @include c-nios2.texi
7924 @end ifset
7925
7926 @ifset NS32K
7927 @include c-ns32k.texi
7928 @end ifset
7929
7930 @ifset PDP11
7931 @include c-pdp11.texi
7932 @end ifset
7933
7934 @ifset PJ
7935 @include c-pj.texi
7936 @end ifset
7937
7938 @ifset PPC
7939 @include c-ppc.texi
7940 @end ifset
7941
7942 @ifset PRU
7943 @include c-pru.texi
7944 @end ifset
7945
7946 @ifset RL78
7947 @include c-rl78.texi
7948 @end ifset
7949
7950 @ifset RISCV
7951 @include c-riscv.texi
7952 @end ifset
7953
7954 @ifset RX
7955 @include c-rx.texi
7956 @end ifset
7957
7958 @ifset S390
7959 @include c-s390.texi
7960 @end ifset
7961
7962 @ifset SCORE
7963 @include c-score.texi
7964 @end ifset
7965
7966 @ifset SH
7967 @include c-sh.texi
7968 @include c-sh64.texi
7969 @end ifset
7970
7971 @ifset SPARC
7972 @include c-sparc.texi
7973 @end ifset
7974
7975 @ifset TIC54X
7976 @include c-tic54x.texi
7977 @end ifset
7978
7979 @ifset TIC6X
7980 @include c-tic6x.texi
7981 @end ifset
7982
7983 @ifset TILEGX
7984 @include c-tilegx.texi
7985 @end ifset
7986
7987 @ifset TILEPRO
7988 @include c-tilepro.texi
7989 @end ifset
7990
7991 @ifset V850
7992 @include c-v850.texi
7993 @end ifset
7994
7995 @ifset VAX
7996 @include c-vax.texi
7997 @end ifset
7998
7999 @ifset VISIUM
8000 @include c-visium.texi
8001 @end ifset
8002
8003 @ifset WASM32
8004 @include c-wasm32.texi
8005 @end ifset
8006
8007 @ifset XGATE
8008 @include c-xgate.texi
8009 @end ifset
8010
8011 @ifset XSTORMY16
8012 @include c-xstormy16.texi
8013 @end ifset
8014
8015 @ifset XTENSA
8016 @include c-xtensa.texi
8017 @end ifset
8018
8019 @ifset Z80
8020 @include c-z80.texi
8021 @end ifset
8022
8023 @ifset Z8000
8024 @include c-z8k.texi
8025 @end ifset
8026
8027 @ifset GENERIC
8028 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
8029 @raisesections
8030 @end ifset
8031
8032 @node Reporting Bugs
8033 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8034 @cindex bugs in assembler
8035 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
8036
8037 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
8038
8039 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
8040 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
8041 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
8042 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
8043
8044 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8045 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8046
8047 @menu
8048 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8049 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8050 @end menu
8051
8052 @node Bug Criteria
8053 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8054 @cindex bug criteria
8055
8056 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8057
8058 @itemize @bullet
8059 @cindex fatal signal
8060 @cindex assembler crash
8061 @cindex crash of assembler
8062 @item
8063 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8064 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
8065
8066 @cindex error on valid input
8067 @item
8068 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8069
8070 @cindex invalid input
8071 @item
8072 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8073 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
8074 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
8075
8076 @item
8077 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
8078 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
8079 @end itemize
8080
8081 @node Bug Reporting
8082 @section How to Report Bugs
8083 @cindex bug reports
8084 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
8085
8086 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
8087 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
8088 contact that organization first.
8089
8090 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8091 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8092 distribution.
8093
8094 @ifset BUGURL
8095 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8096 to @value{BUGURL}.
8097 @end ifset
8098
8099 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8100 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8101 fact or leave it out, state it!
8102
8103 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8104 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8105 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8106 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8107 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8108 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8109 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8110 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8111 and the most helpful.
8112
8113 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8114 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8115 that the bug has not been reported previously.
8116
8117 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8118 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8119 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8120 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8121
8122 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8123
8124 @itemize @bullet
8125 @item
8126 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8127 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8128
8129 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8130 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8131
8132 @item
8133 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8134
8135 @item
8136 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8137 version number.
8138
8139 @item
8140 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8141 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8142
8143 @item
8144 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8145 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8146 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8147
8148 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8149 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8150
8151 @item
8152 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8153 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8154 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8155 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8156 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8157 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8158 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8159
8160 @item
8161 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8162 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8163
8164 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8165 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8166 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8167 make a mistake.
8168
8169 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8170 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8171 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8172 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8173 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8174 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8175 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8176 observations.
8177
8178 @item
8179 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8180 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8181 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8182 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8183 by line number.
8184
8185 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8186 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8187 @end itemize
8188
8189 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8190
8191 @itemize @bullet
8192 @item
8193 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8194
8195 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8196 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8197 changes will not affect it.
8198
8199 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8200 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8201 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8202 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8203
8204 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8205 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8206 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8207 less time, and so on.
8208
8209 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8210 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8211
8212 @item
8213 A patch for the bug.
8214
8215 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8216 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8217 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8218 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8219
8220 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8221 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8222 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8223 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8224
8225 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8226 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8227 help us to understand.
8228
8229 @item
8230 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8231
8232 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8233 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8234 @end itemize
8235
8236 @node Acknowledgements
8237 @chapter Acknowledgements
8238
8239 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8240 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8241 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8242 @c (October 2012),
8243 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8244
8245 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8246 more details?}
8247
8248 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8249 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8250 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8251
8252 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8253 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8254 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8255 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8256 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8257 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8258 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8259 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8260 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8261 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8262
8263 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8264 in format-specific I/O modules.
8265
8266 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8267 has done much work with it since.
8268
8269 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8270
8271 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8272
8273 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8274 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8275
8276 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8277 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8278 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8279 support a.out format.
8280
8281 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8282 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8283 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8284 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8285 targets.
8286
8287 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8288 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8289 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8290 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8291 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8292 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8293 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8294
8295 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8296 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8297 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8298 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8299
8300 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8301
8302 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8303
8304 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8305 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8306 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8307 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8308
8309 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8310 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8311 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8312 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8313 and some initial 64-bit support).
8314
8315 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8316
8317 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8318 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8319
8320 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8321 flavors.
8322
8323 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8324 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8325
8326 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8327 configuration enhancements.
8328
8329 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8330
8331 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8332 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8333 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8334 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8335
8336 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8337 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8338 @include fdl.texi
8339
8340 @node AS Index
8341 @unnumbered AS Index
8342
8343 @printindex cp
8344
8345 @bye
8346 @c Local Variables:
8347 @c fill-column: 79
8348 @c End:
This page took 0.268804 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.